JP6941374B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, as one of the game consoles such as slot machines and pachinko machines, a game console that produces a response in response to an operation of an operating means such as a button has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-205705

However, in the conventional game table, there is a problem that it is difficult to understand which response effect is started until the player operates the operation means, and there is room for improvement.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a characteristic of production.

The game console according to the present invention is a game console provided with an operation means provided at a position where a player can operate, an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects, and a display means. One type of production of the types of production is the first production, and one type of production of the plurality of types of production is the second production, and of the plurality of types of production. One type of effect is a third effect, the first effect is an effect that may be performed during a period of time, and the second effect is performed during the period of time. In some cases, only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in the certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). When the first effect and the second effect or the third effect are executed in duplicate for at least a part of the certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"). ), And in the first effect, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation display") is displayed, and an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first operation display") is displayed. Hereinafter, the “first response effect”) is executed, and the second effect in the first case is a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, “second operation display”). ”) Is displayed, and an effect (hereinafter referred to as“ second response effect ”) corresponding to the operation of the operating means is executed. In the second case, the first effect. While one effect is executed , instead of the second effect, the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed, and another certain effect, the third effect, is executed. The third effect is an effect that is executed during at least a part of the certain period, and the third effect is an effect that does not include a display prompting the operation of the operating means. The third effect is the effect executed in the state where the first operation display in the first effect is started in the second case, and the first response effect and the first effect. The second response effect is a notification regarding the addition of the privilege, the third effect is a notice regarding the addition of the privilege, and the first response effect in the second case is the first effect. It is a game table characterized in that it is an effect of being notified by adding up the addition of the above-mentioned privilege to be notified in the second effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table having a feature in the production.

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) developed in a plane. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the slot machine 100. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts of each winning combination, and the like. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of the winning combination in each game state. (A) Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the timer interrupt process of a main control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the effect control process in the 1st sub-control unit main process. (C) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (D) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. It is a flowchart of a state notification process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concept of "the first notification" which concerns on this invention. It is a figure which showed the effect including the 1st notification which concerns on Example 1 in time series. It is a figure which showed the effect including the 1st notification which concerns on Example 2 in time series. It is a flowchart of the state notification processing which concerns on a modification. It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table of the state notification lottery, and the precursor game number determination table. It is a figure which showed the effect including the 1st notification which concerns on Example 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed the effect including the 1st notification which concerns on Example 4 in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the modification of the notification timing of the first notification. It is a figure which showed the modification of the mode of the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to (b) to (d) special combination 1 and AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay. It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination) of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 2, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the payout number of each winning combination and the like. It is a transition diagram of the game state of the slot machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of the state notification processing which concerns on this Embodiment 2. It is a figure which showed an example of various lottery tables for executing the effect which concerns on Example 1 of this Embodiment 2. It is a figure which showed an example of the production which concerns on Example 1 of this Embodiment 2 in time series. It is a time chart of the production which concerns on Example 1 of this Embodiment 2. It is a figure which showed an example of various lottery tables for executing the effect which concerns on Example 2 of this Embodiment 2. It is a figure which showed an example of the production which concerns on Example 2 of this Embodiment 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed the effect example of the pattern which returns to AT from pullback 1G in the effect which concerns on Example 2 of this Embodiment 2. It is a time chart of the production which concerns on Example 2 of this Embodiment 2. It is a figure which showed an example of the production which concerns on Example 3 of this Embodiment 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the production which concerns on Example 3 of this Embodiment 2 in time series. It is a time chart of the production which concerns on Example 3 of this Embodiment 2. It is a figure which showed an example of various lottery tables for executing the effect which concerns on Example 4 of this Embodiment 2. It is a figure which showed an example of various lottery tables for executing the effect which concerns on Example 4 of this Embodiment 2. It is a figure which showed an example of the production which concerns on Example 4 of this Embodiment 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the production which concerns on Example 4 of this Embodiment 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the production which concerns on Example 4 of this Embodiment 2 in time series. It is a time chart of the production which concerns on Example 4 of this Embodiment 2. Times shown in chronological order of the relationship between the flow of the game of the game console according to the inventions 2-1 to 2-8 of the present application, the contents of various effects performed during the game, and the contents of various operations performed during the game. This is an example of a chart. Times shown in chronological order of the relationship between the flow of the game of the game console according to the inventions 2-1 to 2-8 of the present application, the contents of various effects performed during the game, and the contents of various operations performed during the game. This is an example of a chart. FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an enlarged chance zone with a reference numeral X in FIG. 38, and is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect produced by the effect lamp when the AT is not restored. FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an enlarged chance zone with a reference numeral X in FIG. 38, and is a diagram showing a modified example of the effect produced by the effect lamp when returning to AT. It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table for executing the effect which concerns on (a), (b) Embodiment 3. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the internal lottery processing which concerns on Embodiment 3. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the lottery process such as a winning combination in the internal lottery process which concerns on Embodiment 3. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the state update process which concerns on Embodiment 3. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the reel stop control processing which concerns on a modification. It is a time chart for demonstrating the outline of the privilege effect which the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 can execute. It is a time chart for demonstrating the modification of the privilege effect which the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 can execute. It is a figure which showed an example of the 1G complete freeze which concerns on Embodiment 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the 1G completion button which concerns on Embodiment 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the freeze after 3G which concerns on Embodiment 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed an example of the 3G interlocking button which concerns on Embodiment 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed the modification 1 of the 1G complete freeze (privilege production) in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the modification 2 of the 1G complete freeze (privilege production) in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the modification of the 1G completion button (non-privilege production) in chronological order. (A)-(c) It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table for executing the effect which concerns on this Embodiment 4. (A), (b) It is a figure which showed an example of the lottery table for executing the effect which concerns on this Embodiment 4. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the internal lottery processing which concerns on Embodiment 4. (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the effect control process which concerns on Embodiment 4. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of various effect setting process in the effect control process which concerns on Embodiment 4. It is a time chart for demonstrating the outline of the interlocking effect (first effect) and 1G complete effect (second effect) that can be executed by the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. (A) It is a time chart which showed another example of "a certain period" which concerns on this invention. (B) It is a time chart which showed other example of the "second effect" which concerns on this invention. (C) It is a time chart which showed other examples of "first effect" and "second effect" which concerns on this invention. (A) It is a figure which showed the specific example 1 of the 1G completion effect in time series when it is not executed overlapping with the interlocking effect (the first effect). (B) It is a figure which showed the specific example 1 of the 1G completion effect in the time series when it is executed overlapping with the interlocking effect (the first effect). (A) It is a figure which showed the specific example 2 of the 1G completion effect in time series when it is not executed overlapping with the interlocking effect (the first effect). (B) It is a figure which showed the specific example 2 of the 1G completion effect in the time series when it is executed overlapping with the interlocking effect (the first effect). It is a figure which showed the specific example 3 of the 1G completion effect in the time series when it is executed overlapping with the interlocking effect (the first effect). It is a front view which showed an example of the pachinko machine.

<< Embodiment 1 >>
Hereinafter, the game console (slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Basic configuration>
First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member in an appropriate number at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a winning line (effective line) 114 that is valid. Here, the effective line is a line used for determining whether or not the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations, which will be described later, are displayed (whether or not they are aligned) among the five winning lines 114 shown in FIG. Is.

In this example, when three medals are bet, the right-up effective line composed of the left reel lower symbol, the middle reel middle symbol, and the right reel upper symbol (for example, see the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 12 and the like). ) Is enabled, and the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. As described above, the effective line is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium, and in this example, when the number of inserted medals is less than 3, the effective line is invalid. The number of effective lines in the game console according to the present invention is not limited to one, and for example, the number of effective lines and the position of the winning line to be valid are set according to the number of medals inserted. You may.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that he / she has been internally elected to a specific winning combination (specifically, special role 1 or special role 2) in the internal lottery described later, or that he / she is in a bonus game. It is a lamp that informs you. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-played (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for directing.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, a maximum of three bets are inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game starts to notify that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order (or push order). Further, the operation order in which the first stop operation is set to the left reel 110 and the second stop operation is set to the stop operation of the middle reel 111 is called a forward push operation order (or forward push), and the first stop operation is right. The stop operation in which the reel 112 is used and the second stop operation is the stop operation of the middle reel 111 is referred to as a reverse push operation sequence (or reverse push).

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and ejecting them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160.

The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image) arranged behind the shutter 163. A display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has become.

It should be noted that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device but may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is visible to the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may be square. Further, an ornament (not shown) may be provided on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of an internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel stop. A ROM 306 for storing the position and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing the data, an I / O 310 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring the time and the number of times. , WDT (Watchdog Timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 has a random number value generation circuit 316 that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a is received (this circuit contains two random number value generation circuits). The CPU 304 is provided with a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal when the start-up signal is input from the start-up signal output circuit 338. Game control is started (main processing of the main control unit, which will be described later, is started).

The random number value generation circuit 316 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. There are roughly two types of methods for generating a random number value in the random number value generation circuit 316: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two more methods for random number mode.

The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using the seed of the random number value, and derive the operation result as a random number value. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number value. The random number value generation circuit 316 acquires irregular values by utilizing white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320. The random number value generation circuit 316 uses the value acquired in this way as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of a random number value, or determines a read start position of a random number table. Use.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medal payout device 180, optical type of reel 110 The state of the sensor, the optical sensor of the reel 111, the optical sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 to detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 are installed on the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects the closing operation when doing so. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. The above sensors may be non-contact type sensors or contact type sensors.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and the light-shielding pieces provided on the reel frame pass through. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. The drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129 are game start lamp 121, storage number display. A drive circuit 328 for driving the device 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127) is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal plate 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and an external hall computer (not shown) or the like is connected to the main control unit 300 via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is unidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured so that a signal such as a command cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface. It is connected.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including the display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various production drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with 512 and. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for dividing the frequency, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a drive circuit 530 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 530 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 530 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 504.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a sensor circuit 532, and the sensor circuit 532 is connected to a shutter sensor 538 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface. The CPU 504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 538 for each interrupt time.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads the image data or the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3 is a plan showing an arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in a plan-like manner.

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 1 to 20 in this embodiment) of a plurality of types (8 types in this embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. .. Further, the numbers 1 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers (symbol position numbers) indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the symbol position number 1 of the left reel 110 is "bell symbol", the symbol position number 2 of the middle reel 111 is "seven 2 symbol", and the symbol position number 1 of the right reel 112 is "replay". "Designs" are arranged respectively.

The slot machine in this embodiment corresponds to a stop button operated within the maximum retractable range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated in order to improve the interest of the game. It is configured to stop the reel. Therefore, symbols such as bell symbols and replay symbols that are arranged without exceeding the maximum retractable range exist within the maximum retractable range from the effective line regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Therefore, only this symbol is used. The winning combination is a winning combination regardless of the operation timing.

On the other hand, symbols such as the Seven 1 symbol, the Seven 2 symbol, the BAR symbol, the watermelon symbol, and the cherry symbol, which are arranged on the reels 110 to 112 beyond the maximum retractable range, may be arranged on the reels 110 to 112 depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139. It may not exist within the maximum pull-in range from the effective line. Therefore, the winning combination including this symbol is a winning combination that can be won only when the operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is appropriate.

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100.

As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 100 can be roughly classified into a re-game combination low probability state (RT1), a re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2), a re-game combination high probability state (RT3), and a special combination. There are a total of five gaming states, an internal winning gaming state (RT4) and a special gaming state (RT5). In addition, the transition conditions (A) to (G) of each gaming state are described in the figure, and when the transition conditions (A) to (G) described in each arrow are satisfied, the direction of the arrow is reached. The game state changes (details will be described later).

<Replaying role low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game combination low probability state (RT1) is a so-called “normal” state, and is a default game state that is initially set after the power is turned on or the like. In the re-game combination low probability state (RT1), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery value in the column of "RT1" in the lottery table shown in FIG.

In the re-game role low probability state (RT1), the re-game role 2 (chance replay 1), the re-game role 3 (chance replay 2), the small role 1 (watermelon), the small role 2 (strong cherry), the small role 3 ( When any of the roles (excluding duplicate roles) of (weak cherry) is won, the player shifts (promotes) to the replay high probability preparation state (RT2) described later. Further, when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the game shifts to the special role internal winning game state (RT4) described later.

<Replaying role high probability ready state (RT2)>
The re-game combination high-probability preparation state (RT2) is a so-called “AT preparing” state, and is more re-game than the re-game combination low-probability state (RT1) and the re-game combination high-probability state (RT3) described later. It is a gaming state in which the probability of winning the role 1 internally is low. In the re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery value in the column of "RT2" in the lottery table shown in FIG.

In the re-game role high probability preparation state (RT2), any of the re-game role 4 (AT rush replay), the re-game role 4'(AT rush replay), and the re-game role 4'(AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay) If you win the role, you will be transferred (promoted) to the re-game role high probability state (RT3), which will be described later, and when the specified number of games (the number of games fluctuates) is exhausted, the re-game role low probability state (probability state) ( Move (demotion) to RT1). Further, when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the game shifts to the special role internal winning game state (RT4) described later.

<Replaying role high probability state (RT3)>
The re-game combination high probability state (RT3) is a so-called "AT" or "pseudo-bonus" state, from the re-game combination low probability state (RT1) and the re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2). Is also in a gaming state in which the probability of internal winning of the replaying combination 1 is high. In the re-game combination high probability state (RT3), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery value in the column of "RT3" in the lottery table shown in FIG. An example of the "second bonus" according to the present invention corresponds to this replaying combination high probability state (RT3), and may be simply referred to as a "pseudo bonus" or a "second bonus" below.

In the re-game combination high probability state (RT3), when the specified number of games (the number of games fluctuates) is exhausted, the game shifts (demotions) to the re-game combination low probability state (RT1). Further, when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the game shifts to the special role internal winning game state (RT4) described later.

<Special role internal winning game state (RT4)>
The special role internal winning game state (RT4) is a so-called "internal winning" state, and is a game state in which a special role is internally won. In the special role internal winning game state (RT4), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery value in the column of "RT4" in the lottery table shown in FIG.

In the special role internal winning game state (RT4), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is displayed (when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is won), the special game state (RT5) described later ).

<Special game state (RT5)>
The special gaming state (RT5) is a so-called "bonus in progress" state, from the replaying combination low probability state (RT1), the replaying combination high probability preparation state (RT2), and the replaying combination high probability state (RT3). Is also an advantageous gaming state for the player. In the special game state (RT5), the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery value in the "RT5" column of the lottery table shown in FIG. An example of the "first bonus" according to the present invention corresponds to this special gaming state (RT5), and may be simply referred to as a "bonus" or a "first bonus" below.

In the special gaming state (RT5), only one of the replaying combinations 1 to 4 and the small winning combination 1 to the small winning combination 4 can be internally elected. In addition, in the special game state (RT5), the number of medals exceeding the specified number (in this example, 300 big bonuses and 100 regular bonuses) is paid out, and the AT lottery is performed during the special game state (RT5). If the player does not win, the player shifts to the re-game combination low probability state (RT1). In addition, when the AT lottery is won during the special game state (RT5), the state shifts to the re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2).

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts of each winning combination, and the like.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special role 1 and special role 2 (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "special role"), re-game combination 1-re-game combination 4, re-game combination 4', and so on. Re-gaming combination 4 ″ (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as “re-gaming combination”, and re-gaming combination 4, re-gaming combination 4 ′, and re-gaming combination 4 ″ are collectively referred to as “re-gaming combination 4”. (May be), and small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 4 (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "small winning combination").

The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted. Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special role is a role of shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the replaying role is a role that enables replaying without inserting a new medal. These winning combinations may be referred to as "acting combinations". In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the valid line, for example, the special combination and the replay. Includes winning a game role.

<Types of winning roles / special roles>
The special role 1 is a role (operating role) that shifts to the big bonus of the special gaming state (RT5) by winning a prize, and the special role 2 is a role that shifts to the regular bonus of the special gaming state (RT5) by winning a prize (acting role). ). However, no medals will be paid out for winning the role itself.

In this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1) is "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol". Further, the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 2 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 2) is "BAR symbol-BAR symbol-BAR symbol".

When the special combination is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special role internal winning gaming state (RT4). This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, in the game in which the special role is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combinations corresponding to the special role will be aligned on the effective line. It will be easy to win a prize.

Specifically, when the special role 1 is internally won and the game state shifts to the special role internal winning game state (RT4), the special combination 1 compatible symbol combination (in this example, Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven). It is possible to win a prize (1 symbol), and the special combination internal winning game state (RT4) is maintained (carried over) until the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In addition, when the special role 2 is internally won and the game state shifts to the special role internal winning game state (RT4), the special combination 2 compatible symbol combination (BAR symbol-BAR symbol-BAR symbol in this example) is won. It is possible, and the special combination internal winning game state (RT4) is maintained (carried over) until the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line.

<Types of winning roles / replaying roles>
The re-gaming role (re-gaming role 1 to re-gaming role 4, re-gaming role 4', re-gaming role 4'') is to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. It is a winning role (acting role) that can be played, and medals are not paid out. In addition, the re-game combination 2 and 3 are roles that shift to the re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2) by winning a prize. After that, replay 1 is "replay", replay 2 is "chance replay 1", replay 3 is "chance replay 2", replay 4, replay 4', and replay 4'. ´ may be referred to as “AT rush replay”.

The re-gaming role may be a role in which the player can play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when a prize is won in the re-game role, the medal may be automatically inserted in the next game, or the medal inserted in the game in which the re-game role is won may be carried over to the next game as it is. It may be something that can be used.

In this example, the corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. 5, but it goes without saying that the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combination are not limited to the symbol combinations shown in FIG.

Of the symbol combinations "blank symbol (or replay symbol) -replay symbol-blank symbol (or cherry symbol)" corresponding to the replay combination 2, "blank symbol (or replay symbol)" is stopped and displayed. It indicates that the symbol to be displayed may be a "blank symbol" or a "replay symbol", and in the "blank symbol (or cherry symbol)", the symbol to be stopped and displayed is a "blank symbol" or a "cherry symbol". It shows that it is good.

Of the symbol combinations "Seven 1 symbol (or BAR symbol or watermelon symbol) -replay symbol-watermelon symbol" corresponding to the replay combination 3, "Seven 1 symbol (or BAR symbol or watermelon symbol)" Indicates that the symbol to be stopped and displayed may be any one of "Seven 1 symbol", "BAR symbol", and "watermelon symbol".

Further, the re-gaming combination 4, the re-gaming combination 4', and the re-gaming combination 4'are roles that shift to the re-gaming combination high probability state (RT3) by winning a prize, and the condition device (flag) is common (one). ). In this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 4 is "bell symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol", and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 4'is "bell symbol-seven 2 symbol-seven 1". The symbol combination that is "symbol" and corresponds to the replay combination 4 "is" Seven 1 symbol-Seven 2 symbol-Seven 1 symbol ".

As described above, the Seven 1 symbol and the Seven 2 symbol are symbols arranged on the reels 110 to 112 beyond the maximum retractable range, and may be within the maximum retractable range from the effective line depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Occasionally it does not exist. Therefore, the re-game combination 4 ″, which is composed of only the Seven 1 symbol and the Seven 2 symbol, wins a prize only when all the operation timings of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are appropriate.

Further, the re-game combination 4 ′ including the Seven 1 symbol and the Seven 2 symbol is a case where the re-game combination 4 ″ is not won, and the operation timing of the stop button 138 or 139 is appropriate. Only if you win. Further, if neither the re-gaming combination 4 ″ nor the re-gaming combination 4 ′ is won, the bell symbol and the replay symbol arranged on the reels 110 to 112 without exceeding the maximum pull-in range are composed. Win a prize in the reel game role 4.

<Types of winning roles / small roles>
The small role (small role 1 to small role 4) is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and thereafter, the small role 1 is "watermelon", the small role 2 is "strong cherry", and the small role 3 May be called "weak cherry" and small role 4 may be called "bell". The corresponding symbol combinations and the number of payouts are as shown in FIG. In addition, "ANY" in the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY-cherry symbol (or watermelon symbol)" corresponding to the small winning combination 2 and the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY-replay symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 3. Indicates that the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be any symbol.

In addition, among the symbol combinations "cherry symbol-ANY-cherry symbol (or watermelon symbol)" corresponding to the small role 2, the "cherry symbol (or watermelon symbol)" is stopped and displayed as the "cherry symbol". Or, it indicates that the "watermelon pattern" may be used.

<Lottery table for winning roles>
Next, the lottery table for the winning combination will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a lottery table for winning combinations in each gaming state. The horizontal axis represents the set value and the gaming state (RT1 to RT5), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of the winning combination in each gaming state.

The internal winning probability of the winning combination described below can be calculated by dividing the lottery value associated with each winning combination by the numerical range of the random number value acquired at the time of the internal lottery (for example, 65536). .. The lottery value is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each winning combination (including loss). In the internal lottery process (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, it is determined whether or not the acquired random number value is the lottery value corresponding to which winning combination, and a process of determining the internal lottery combination is executed. For this lottery value, lottery values of setting 1 to setting 6 having different winning probabilities of at least one winning combination are prepared, and a game store clerk or the like can arbitrarily select and set one of the set values. can.

In this example, in RT1 to RT3, since the lottery value of the special role 1 is 2, the internal winning probability is 2/65536, and since the lottery value of the special role 2 is 163, the internal winning is the internal winning. The probability is 163/65536. Further, in RT0, RT3, and RT4, since the lottery value of the replaying combination 4 is 0, the internal winning probability is 0%, and in RT2, the lottery value of the replaying combination 4 is 655. Therefore, the internal winning probability is 655/65536, and in RT5, since the lottery value of the replaying combination 4 is 200, the internal winning probability is 200/65536.

Further, in this example, a "duplicate combination" is provided so that a plurality of types of combinations can be internally elected at the same time. Here, the duplicate combination is not a single combination but a collection of a plurality of combinations, and the condition device (flag) corresponding to the duplicate combination does not operate, and the plurality of combinations included in the duplicate combination are included. Each of the condition devices corresponding to the above is activated. In addition, the "simultaneous internal winning" in the present specification means, for example, the case where a special role and a small role are simultaneously and internally won by the winning combination internal lottery, and the case where the winning combination internal lottery before the previous time is internally won as a special role. (There is a special role internal winning), and both cases where a small role is internally won in this prize-winning role internal lottery are included.

The "special role 1 + small role 1" shown in FIG. 6 is a duplicate role that can be internally elected to the special role 1 and the small role 1 at the same time, and the "special role 1 + small role 2" is the special role 1 and the small role. It is a duplicate combination that can be internally elected to the role 2 at the same time, and "special role 1 + replay combination 2" is a duplicate combination that can be internally elected to the special role 1 and the replay combination 2 at the same time. "Special role 1 + re-game combination 3" is a duplicate combination that can be internally elected to the special role 1 and the re-game combination 3 at the same time.

In the present embodiment, a "pushing order combination (operation order combination)" including a combination that can win a prize only when a stop operation is performed in the correct answer operation order (correct answer pressing order) is provided, and a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is provided. A small combination determined by the operation order may be called a "pushing order small combination". When the push order small winning combination is internally won, which symbol combination is displayed on the effective line is determined according to the combination of the operation order and the operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, when the push order small combination "small combination 4 (left first stop)" is internally won, the stop operation is performed in a predetermined correct operation order (the left reel 110 is the first stop operation). In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (in this example, "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol") is displayed on the effective line, and eight medals are paid out.

In addition, when the push order small combination "small combination 4 (middle first stop)" is internally won, when the stop operation is performed in the predetermined correct answer operation order (middle reel 111 is the first stop operation). In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (in this example, "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol") is displayed on the effective line, and eight medals are paid out. In addition, when the push order small combination "small combination 4 (right first stop)" is internally won, when the stop operation is performed in the predetermined correct answer operation order (the right reel 112 is the first stop operation). In this case, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (in this example, "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol") is displayed on the effective line, and eight medals are paid out.

In RT3, when the small winning combination 4 (first stop on the left), the small winning combination 4 (first stop in the middle), or the small winning combination 4 (first stop on the right) is internally won, and in RT2, the small winning combination 4 (first stop on the right). When the middle 1st stop) or the small winning combination 4 (right 1st stop) is internally won, the effect image display device 157 is used to display a push order navigation that suggests the correct answer operation order (correct answer push order). do. Further, in RT3, when any of the re-game combination 2, the re-game combination 3, and the small combination 1 to the small combination 3 is internally won, an additional lottery for AT is performed.

In addition, in RT5, when the re-game combination 4 is internally elected, the push order navigation that enables the winning of the re-game combination 4 ″ is performed, and the re-game combination 4, the re-game combination 4 ′, and the re-game combination 4 ″ are performed. Since the game shifts to RT2 after the end of RT5 regardless of the winning of the re-game combination 4 ″, the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest an AT rush (transition to RT2) (AT rush effect). )I do.

On the other hand, in RT5, when the re-game combination 1 is internally won, the effect image display device 157 is used to perform a fake AT rush effect (gase AT fanning). Further, in RT5, if any of the re-game combination 2, the re-game combination 3, and the small combination 1 to the small combination 3 is internally won, a lottery (AT rush lottery) as to whether or not to shift to RT2 after the end of RT5 is performed. ), And if the lottery is won, the AT rush effect is not performed during RT5, and the effect is performed after the end of RT5.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7A. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.
As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has input the start signal starts resetting by reset interruption and executes the main processing of the main control unit according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, the main control unit initial setting process is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initial setting process, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT 314 is set. Allow operation and set initial values.

In step S102, the game start process is executed. In this game start process, processing such as checking whether or not the operation by the start lever 135 or the operation by the bet buttons 130 to 132 (the bet number setting operation) is accepted, and checking whether or not the bet number has reached the specified number is performed. conduct. Further, in this game start process, a process of determining an effective line based on the number of inserted medals, a process of acquiring a random number value generated by the random number generation circuit 316, and the like are also performed.

In the next step S103, an internal lottery process is performed. In this internal lottery process, a process related to a lottery using the lottery table of the winning combination shown in FIG. 6 and a random number value acquired in step S102 above (winning combination internal lottery), and an internal lottery processing command including information on the internal winning combination Is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S104, the effect state related process is performed. In this effect state-related process, the reel effect is controlled. In the first stop preparation process of step S105, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal lottery result) of step S103. In step S106, the reel rotation start process is performed. In this reel rotation start process, a process of rotating the reels 110 to 112 and the like is performed. In step S107, the reel stop control process is performed. In this reel stop control process, when all the reels 110 to 112 are not stopped (when the third stop operation is not performed), a process of stopping the reels 110 to 112 and the like are performed, and all the reels are stopped. When 110 to 112 are stopped (when the third stop operation is performed), the process proceeds to step S108.

In step S108, the winning determination process is performed. In this winning judgment processing, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the valid line, the processing of determining that the winning combination has been won, or the winning determination processing command including information on the winning combination is the first. Preparations for transmission to the sub-control unit 400 and the like are performed. In step S109, the state update process is performed. In this state update process, processing related to the transition of the game state is performed, and when the start condition and the end condition are satisfied, the process of shifting the game state and the game state update command including the information related to the game state (RT) are first issued. Preparations for transmission to the sub-control unit 400 and the like are performed.

In step S110, the medal granting process is performed. In this medal granting process, when a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines. With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In the next step S202, the WDT314 is periodically set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur when the count value of the WDT314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) (so that a processing abnormality is not detected). (In this embodiment, it is restarted once every about 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit).

In step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal reception sensor for medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 141) are used via the input port of the I / O 310. , Start lever 135 sensor, Stop button 137 sensor, Stop button 138 sensor, Stop button 139 sensor, Settlement button 134 sensor, Medal payout sensor of medal paid out from medal payout device 180, Index sensor of reel 110, Index sensor of reel 111 , The index sensor of the reel 112, etc.), the detection signal of the sensor circuit 320 is input, the presence or absence of the detection signal is monitored, and the detection signal is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 318.

In step S204, various game processes are performed. In these various game processes, processing according to each state such as basic processing state, medal selector processing state, medal payout acceptance processing state, reel control state (acceleration control state, constant speed control state, brake control state, stop control state), etc. And so on. In step S205, the timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S206, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands for which transmission preparation is completed are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits in this example, and the bits 15 are strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is set) and bits. 11 to 14 are composed of command types, and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Here, the command types include, for example, a basic command, a start lever reception command, an internal lottery processing command, an effect command associated with the effect lottery process, and a command for starting rotation of the first to third reels associated with the start of rotation of the reels 110 to 112. , 1st to 3rd stop operation commands (hereinafter, may be collectively referred to as "stop operation commands") associated with the acceptance of operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and stop position information associated with the stop processing of the reels 110 to 112. Examples include a command, a winning determination processing command, a payout processing start command and a payout processing end command associated with the medal payout process, and a game state update command including information on the game state.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data. In step S207, the external signal setting process is performed. In this external signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S403, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 336, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211. When the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210. In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, a process of setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each of the original registers is performed. After that, it returns to the main processing of the main control unit. On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. 8B is a flowchart of the effect control process in the first sub-control unit main process. (C) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and FIG. (D) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

When the power is turned on, the initial setting process is first executed in step S301. In this initial setting process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S302, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S303. In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing is performed. In this command processing, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 executes various processes corresponding to the command when the command is received from the main control unit 300. For example, if a game state update command is received from the main control unit 300 and the command includes information indicating that the game state is the special game state (RT5), whether or not to give AT. The AT lottery will be held. That is, in the present embodiment, the AT lottery is performed every game during the bonus.

In step S305, the effect control process is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this effect control process, for example, when a new command is generated in step S304, various processes corresponding to the command are executed in step S304, and the effect instruction set in the various processes is executed. Perform the processing corresponding to. In this process, for example, the effect data such as the first notification (state notification) described later may be read from the ROM 406, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data may be updated. included.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S307, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, information output processing for setting to transmit a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S305, the setting to output this control command is made, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the effect control process in the first sub-control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (b). In step S401, the status notification process is performed. Details will be described later, but in this status notification process, various flags related to the execution timing of the chance notification are set according to the winning combination. In step S402, after performing various effect determination processes, the effect control process is terminated. In the various effect determination processes, mainly the process of determining the effect of the display system is performed.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (c). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 8 (d). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S601, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S602, various update processes are performed. In these various update processes, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S308, an effect random number value update process, and the like are performed.

<Status notification processing>
Next, the state notification process (step S401) in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the state notification process.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 100 is in a certain state, if not applicable, the state notification process is terminated, and if it is in a certain state, the process proceeds to step S702. Here, the "certain state" according to the present invention includes, for example, a gaming state of any one of a plurality of types of gaming states (RT1 to RT5) described with reference to FIG. 4, and a small winning combination 4 (bell). ) Push order navigation occurs with high probability, a certain notice (for example, suggestion of the set value after the end of the bonus) is likely to appear, or a special effect (for example, premier effect) may appear. Includes certain states.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not the state flag stored in the RAM 408 is off, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not, the process proceeds to step S708. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the AT including the pseudo bonus is in progress, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S706, and if not applicable, the process proceeds to step S704.

In step S704, it is determined whether or not the first bonus (first privilege) is being played (in this example, the game state is the special game state (RT5)), and if not applicable, the state notification process is performed. The process ends, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery has been won, and if it is not won, the status notification process is terminated, and if it is won, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, the status flag is set to on, and in the next step S707, the status notification process is terminated after setting the status notification command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500.

In step S708, it is determined whether or not the end trigger of a certain state has arrived, if not applicable, the state notification process is terminated, and if the end trigger of a certain state has arrived, the process proceeds to step S709. Here, examples of the end trigger of a certain state include the end of AT, the elapse of a predetermined period, the winning of a certain lottery, the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state, and the like. ..

In step S709, the state end flag is set to on, and in the next step S710, the notification end command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 is set, and the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, the status notification process ends after the status flag is set to off.

In the present embodiment, an example of transmitting a status notification command (performing a status notification) to the second sub-control unit 500 when the AT lottery is won is shown, but the first bonus (first privilege) When the game is in progress (in this example, the game state is the special game state (RT5)), the state may be notified regardless of the AT lottery.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. .. Further, FIG. 3C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and FIG. 3D is a flowchart of an image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S1001 of the second sub-control unit main process, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S1001. In this initialization process, the input / output port initial setting, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1003.

In step S1003, command processing is performed. In this command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and stores the received command as an unprocessed command in the RAM 508. In step S1004, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S1005, command processing is performed. In this command processing, various processes corresponding to the commands saved in the RAM 508 in step S1003 are executed.

In step S1006, the effect control process is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S1005, various processes corresponding to the command are executed in step S1005, and processing corresponding to the effect instruction set in the various processes is performed. .. In this process, for example, the effect data such as the first notification (state notification) described later may be read from the ROM 506, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data may be updated. included.

In step S1007, the shutter control process is performed based on the process result of step S1006. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S1006, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S1008, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S1006. Although the details will be described later, in this image control process, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S1006, the image control corresponding to this command is performed and the process returns to step S1002.

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S1201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S1002 in the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S1002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1202, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, the image control process in step S1008 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described. In step S1301, the image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1303. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S1303, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 forms image data information (coordinate axes of VRAM 536, image size) constituting the display image in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to VRAM 536 in step S1301. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP534. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S1304, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504. In step S1305, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S1306. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is generated. Wait for to be entered. In step S1306, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated, is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<First notification>
Next, the concept of "first notification" according to the present invention will be described in detail. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the concept of "first notification" according to the present invention.

The "first notification" according to the present invention is to notify that the slot machine 100 is in a "certain state". As described above, the "certain state" according to the present invention includes, for example, a gaming state of any one of a plurality of types of gaming states (RT1 to RT5) described with reference to FIG. Compared to the case where it is not in the state, the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability, a certain notice (for example, suggestion of the set value after the end of the bonus) is likely to appear, or a special It includes a state in which there is a high possibility that a different effect (for example, a premier effect) will appear.

As shown in FIG. 10 (a-1), the game console according to the invention 1 of the present application, which will be described later, has the first privilege (the first bonus in this example) after the first privilege (the first bonus in this example) has been won. Then, during at least a part of the period T1 until the end of the first bonus), the first notification of being in a certain state is not executed, but as shown in FIG. 10 (b-1). In addition, when the first privilege (in this example, the first bonus) is won in the state where the first notification for notifying that the player is in a certain state is executed, the first notification is sent in the period T1. It is characterized by continuous execution.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10A-2, the game console according to the invention 2 of the present application, which will be described later, has the first privilege (in this example, the first bonus) after the first privilege (the first bonus) is won. In this example, during at least a part of the period T2 until the first bonus) is won, the first notification of being in a certain state is not executed, but in FIG. 10 (b-2), the first notification is not executed. As shown, when the first privilege (in this example, the first bonus) is won in the state where the first notification of being in a certain state is executed, the first notification is performed in the period T2. It is characterized by continuously executing notification.

In addition, when it is not in a certain state, the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell), a certain notice, and a special effect may not be performed at all, but these may be performed only in a certain state. In addition, as an opportunity to shift to a certain state, for example, when a lottery such as a chance combination is performed, when a combination is determined in the lottery, a certain stop result such as a bell spill is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window. In this case, the number of games reaches a certain number of games. Further, the first notification may be executed by the main control unit 300. Further, it may be configured so that a certain state is not reset (continued) due to power interruption / recovery due to a power failure or the like. Further, only the first notification (continuing in a certain state) may or may not be reset by the power interruption / recovery. Further, when the internal state of the game table is in a certain state and the first notification is reset, it may be restored at a trigger other than the new trigger of the first notification. Further, a certain state may not include the time when the RAM is cleared.

<First notification / Example 1>
Next, a specific example of the "first notification" according to the present invention will be described in detail. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the effects including the first notification according to the first embodiment in chronological order.

<First notification / Example 1 / Normal middle → Certain state → Bonus winning → Bonus end → Certain state end>
In this example, when the first privilege (bonus in this example) is won in the state where the first notification for notifying that the player is in a certain state is executed, the first notification is performed in the first period. Is shown as an example of a game console that continuously executes.

In the state shown in FIG. 12A, the gaming state of the slot machine 100 is normal (re-game combination low probability state (RT1)), and the normal effect is executed by using the effect image display device 157.

In the state shown in FIG. 12B that follows, the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY (in this example, watermelon symbol) -replay symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (weak cherry) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. In addition to winning the small role 3 (weak cherry), the effect image display device 157 is used to notify that the small role 3 (weak cherry) has been won (in this example, the effect in which the princess character appears). Is running.

In addition, here, by the lottery executed at the time of internal winning of the small role 3 (weak cherry), the game state is from normal (re-game role low probability state (RT1)) to AT preparation (re-game role high probability preparation state (re-game role high probability preparation state). With the winning of the lottery to shift to RT2)), the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) is generated with high probability. This "state in which the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability" is an example of the "certain state" according to the present invention.

The trigger for starting the "certain state" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and for example, the acceptance of an operation by a certain operating means, the lapse of a predetermined period from the start of the game, and a certain lottery. The game has been won, the game state has changed to the predetermined game state, and the conditions regarding the profit of the player have been met (for example, when the predetermined number of games has passed, the number of games to be paid out exceeds the predetermined number of game media. (In the case of), the condition regarding the production is satisfied (for example, when a certain production is performed by winning the production lottery, or when the production is performed a predetermined number of times or for a predetermined period).

In the state shown in FIG. 12 (c) that follows, the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY (in this example, watermelon symbol) -cherry symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 2 (strong cherry) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. In addition to winning the small role 2 (strong cherry), the effect image display device 157 is used to notify that the small role 2 (strong cherry) has been won (in this example, the effect in which the princess character appears). Is running. Further, in the game immediately after, the special role 1 is internally won, and the game state is shifted to the internal winning (special role internal winning game state (RT4)).

In the state shown in FIG. 12D, the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the special combination 1 is won. Using the production image display device 157, a bonus confirmation notification (in this example, a production including the character display of "bonus confirmed !!" and the image of "Seven 1 design") is executed to notify that the special role 1 has been won. doing.

In addition, here, the first notification that a certain state (in this example, the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) is triggered by winning the special role 1. The notification (in this example, the state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is performed, and the game state is shifted to the bonus (special game state (RT5)).

In the state shown in FIG. 12 (e) that follows, the bonus has ended due to the payout of medals exceeding the specified number (300 in this example), and the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest the end of the bonus. The bonus end effect (in this example, the effect including the character display of "bonus end") is being executed. Further, here, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is continued.

In the following state shown in FIG. 12 (f), a certain state (re-game combination low probability state (RT1)) is triggered by the transition from the bonus state (special game state (RT5)) to the normal state (re-game combination low probability state (RT1)). The state in which the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) is terminated, and the first notification is terminated.

The trigger for ending the "certain state" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and for example, the AT has ended, a predetermined period has passed, a certain lottery has been won, and the game state. The first notification is sent when the player has moved to a predetermined game state and the conditions regarding the profit of the player have been satisfied (for example, when the predetermined number of games has elapsed or when the number of games to be paid out exceeds the predetermined number of game media). When the predetermined number of bonuses is exhausted after the performance is performed), the conditions for the production are satisfied (for example, when a certain production is performed by winning the production lottery, the production is performed for the predetermined number of times and the period. Case) and the like.

In this example, as described with reference to FIGS. 12 (b) to 12 (f), there is a high probability that the push order navigation in a certain state (small winning combination 4 (bell)) is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 12 (b). The state generated in (1) is started, and the state is ended at the timing shown in FIG. 12 (f).

<First notification / Example 1 / Bonus winning (certain state) → Bonus end (continuing certain state) → Bonus winning>
In the state shown in FIG. 12 (g) that follows, the symbol combination "watermelon symbol-watermelon-watermelon symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is won. At the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to perform a winning effect (in this example, an effect in which a princess character appears) to notify that the small role 1 (watermelon) has been won. Further, in the game immediately after, the special role 1 is internally won, and the game state is shifted to the internal winning (special role internal winning game state (RT4)).

In the state shown in FIG. 12 (h) that follows, the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the special combination 1 is won. Using the production image display device 157, a bonus confirmation notification (in this example, a production including the character display of "bonus confirmed !!" and the image of "Seven 1 design") is executed to notify that the special role 1 has been won. doing.

Further, here, with the winning of the special role 1 as an opportunity, the game state is shifted to the bonus state (special game state (RT5)), and the AT lottery is performed every game. This "state in which the AT lottery is performed" is an example of the "certain state" according to the present invention.

The following state shown in FIG. 12 (i) is a state during the bonus, and here, a bonus effect (in this example, an effect including the number of medals acquired during the bonus) suggesting that the bonus is being executed is executed. ing. Further, here, in the case of winning the AT lottery during the bonus, in the state notification process described with reference to FIG. 9, it is notified that the player is in a certain state (in this example, the state in which the AT lottery is performed). The first notification (in this example, the state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is performed.

In this example, the first notification mode shown in FIG. 12 (i) (notification of notifying that the user is in a certain state (AT lottery)) is shown in FIG. 12 (d). The same notification mode as the notification mode (notification of notifying that a certain state (a state in which the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability)) is the same as the notification mode (in this example, the display of a certain character). The status notification ST) including. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the content of a certain state from the notification mode of the first notification, and it is possible to improve the playability.

Further, in this example, a lottery (in this example, AT) that can shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player during execution of the bonus (in this example, AT is being prepared (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2))). Since the lottery) can be executed and the first notification is executed when the lottery is won, it can be expected that the game will shift to another advantageous gaming state during the bonus, and the first notification is performed during this period. By notifying, the player can pay attention to the first notification even during the bonus, and the motivation for playing can be increased.

In the state shown in FIG. 12 (j), the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed is triggered by the internal winning of the re-game combination 4, the re-game combination 4', and the re-game combination 4'' during the bonus. (In this example, the effect suggesting "reverse push") is performed, and the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is continued.

In the state shown in FIG. 12 (k) that follows, the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 2 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the re-game combination 4 "is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. In addition to winning a prize, the ART confirmation notification (in this example, "superb!" The production including the character display of "!") Is being executed. Further, here, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is continued.

The following state shown in FIG. 12 (l) is a state in which the bonus has ended due to the payout of medals exceeding the specified number (300 in this example), and the effect image display device 157 is used to indicate the end of the bonus. A notice suggesting that the bonus end effect (in this example, the effect including the character display of "bonus end") is executed and the game state is changed to AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)). The production (in this example, the production including the characters "next ART") is being executed.

Further, here, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is continued, and the game state is shifted to AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)). A certain state (a state in which an AT lottery is performed) is being continued.

The following state shown in FIG. 12 (m) shows the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-" corresponding to the special combination 1 on the effective line L1 during AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)). "Seven 1 symbol" is stopped and displayed, and the special role 1 is won, and the effect image display device 157 is used to notify that the special role 1 has been won (in this example, "bonus confirmed !!" Character display and production including the image of "Seven 1 design") are being executed.

Further, here, in the wake of winning the special role 1, the gaming state is shifted to the bonus (special gaming state (RT5)), and at the same time, a certain state (AT lottery is performed) is notified. One notification (state notification ST including display of a certain character) is being continued.

In the following state shown in FIG. 12 (n), the symbol combination "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 (bell) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 during the bonus, and the small winning combination 4 (bell symbol) is displayed. In addition to winning the bell), the production image display device 157 is used to perform a winning production (in this example, a production including the character display of "superb !!") to notify that the small role 4 (bell) has been won. Running.

Further, although not shown, in this example, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is continued until at least the bonus is completed. In this example, as described with reference to FIGS. 12 (h) to 12 (n), a certain state (a state in which an AT lottery is performed) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 12 (h), and at least a bonus is given. It will continue until it finishes.

In this example, when the bonus is won while the first notification is being executed, the bonus is won in the first period (the period from the winning of the bonus in FIG. 12 (m) to the end of the bonus). Since the first notification is continuously executed, the player is not anxious during the first period, and the timing of the first notification can be varied to enhance the interest of the game. .. Further, since the first notification is performed in relation to the bonus, the new player is likely to continue the game until the first notification is performed, and the operating rate of the game console can be increased.

<First notification / Example 2>
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the effects including the first notification according to the first embodiment in chronological order. In this example, when the first privilege (bonus in this example) is won in the state where the first notification for notifying that the player is in a certain state is executed, the first notification is performed in the first period. Is shown as an example of a game console that continuously executes.

<First notification / Example 2 / Bonus winning (certain state) → Bonus end>
In the state shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY (in this example, watermelon symbol) -cherry symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 2 (strong cherry) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 and is small. In addition to winning the role 2 (strong cherry), a winning effect (in this example, a production in which a princess character appears) is used to notify that the small role 2 (strong cherry) has been won by using the effect image display device 157. Running. Further, in the game immediately after, the special role 1 + the small role 2 are internally won, and the game state is shifted to the internal winning (special role internal winning game state (RT4)).

In the state shown in FIG. 13B, the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the special combination 1 is won. Using the production image display device 157, a bonus confirmation notification (in this example, a production including the character display of "bonus confirmed !!" and the image of "Seven 1 design") is executed to notify that the special role 1 has been won. doing.

Further, here, with the winning of the special role 1 as an opportunity, the game state is shifted to the bonus state (special game state (RT5)), and the AT lottery is performed every game. This "state in which the AT lottery is performed" is an example of the "certain state" according to the present invention. However, in this example, during the bonus, the first notification of notifying that the player is in a certain state (the state in which the AT lottery is performed) is not performed.

The following state shown in FIG. 13C is a state during the bonus, and here, a bonus effect (in this example, an effect including the number of medals acquired during the bonus) suggesting that the bonus is being executed is executed. ing.

The state shown in FIG. 13 (d) that follows is a state in which the bonus has ended due to the payout of medals exceeding the specified number (300 in this example), and the effect image display device 157 is used to indicate the end of the bonus. The bonus end effect (in this example, the effect including the character display of "bonus end") is being executed. Further, here, a certain state (a state in which the AT lottery is performed) is completed by shifting the game state to the normal state (re-game combination low probability state (RT1)).

<First notification / Example 2 / Normal → Pseudo bonus winning (certain state) → Bonus winning → Bonus end>
In the following state shown in FIG. 13 (e), the gaming state of the slot machine 100 is normal (re-game combination low probability state (RT1)), and the normal effect is executed using the effect image display device 157.

In the state shown in FIG. 13 (f) that follows, the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY (in this example, watermelon symbol) -cherry symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 2 (strong cherry) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. In addition to winning the small role 2 (strong cherry), the effect image display device 157 is used to notify that the small role 2 (strong cherry) has been won (in this example, the effect in which the princess character appears). Is running. Further, here, a pseudo-bonus precursor effect for announcing the start of the pseudo-bonus (second bonus) is executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 13 (g) that follows, the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 2 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the re-game combination 4 "is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. In addition to winning a prize, a pseudo-bonus confirmation notification (in this example, "bonus" is used to notify that the game state has shifted to the pseudo-bonus (re-game combination high probability state (RT3)) by using the effect image display device 157. The character display of "confirm" and the production including the image of "Seven 2 design") are being executed.

In addition, here, it is notified that a certain state (a state in which the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) is triggered by winning a prize (pseudo-bonus start) in the re-game combination 4 ″. The first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is started.

The state shown in FIG. 13 (h) that follows is a state during the pseudo-bonus, and here, it is notified that a certain state (a state in which the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) is in effect. The first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is being continued.

In the state shown in FIG. 13 (i) that follows, during the pseudo-bonus, the player is internally elected as a duplicate of the special role 1 + the small role 2, and the game state is changed to the internal winning (special role internal winning game state (RT4)). The first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) for notifying that the player is in a certain state (a state in which the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) is continued.

In the state shown in FIG. 13 (j) that follows, the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the special combination 1 is won. Using the production image display device 157, a bonus confirmation notification (in this example, a production including the character display of "bonus confirmed !!" and the image of "Seven 1 design") is executed to notify that the special role 1 has been won. doing.

In addition, here, with the winning of the special role 1 as an opportunity, the game state is shifted to the bonus (special game state (RT5)), and the push order navigation of a certain state (small role 4 (bell)) has a high probability. The first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) for notifying that the character is in the state (state generated in) is being continued.

The following state shown in FIG. 13 (k) is a state during the bonus, and here, a bonus effect (in this example, an effect including the number of medals acquired during the bonus) suggesting that the bonus is being executed is executed. At the same time, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) for notifying that the player is in a certain state (a state in which the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) is continuously performed. There is.

The following state shown in FIG. 13 (l) is a state in which the bonus has ended due to the payout of medals exceeding the specified number (300 in this example), and the effect image display device 157 is used to indicate the end of the bonus. While executing the bonus end effect (in this example, the effect including the information on the total number of medals acquired during the bonus and the set value suggestion effect that suggests the current set value), the game state is being prepared for AT (re-). A notice effect (in this example, an effect including the characters "next ART") that suggests the transition to the game role high probability preparation state (RT2)) is being executed.

Further, here, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is continued, and the game state is shifted to AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)). A certain state (a state in which the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) is continued.

In this example, when the bonus is won while the first notification is being executed, the bonus ends in the first period (after the bonus is won in FIG. 13 (i), the bonus ends in FIG. 13 (l). Since the first notification is continuously executed in the period up to), the player is not anxious in the first period, and the timing of the first notification is varied so that the game can be played. It can enhance the interest. Further, since the first notification is performed in relation to the bonus, the new player is likely to continue the game until the first notification is performed, and the operating rate of the game console can be increased.

<Status notification processing (variation example)>
Next, a modified example of the state notification process in the effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the state notification process according to the modified example, and FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a state notification lottery lottery table and a precursor game number determination table.

In the state notification process shown in FIG. 14, the processes of steps S720 to S722 are adopted instead of the processes of steps S704 to S705 of the state notification process described with reference to FIG.

Specifically, in step S720, it is determined whether or not the current game state is during the first bonus internal winning (in this example, the game state is the special role internal winning game state (RT4)), and it does not correspond. In that case, the status notification process is terminated, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S721. In step S721, for example, referring to the lottery table shown in FIG. 15A, it is determined whether or not the state notification lottery has been won by using the random number value, and if not, the state notification process is terminated. In the case of winning, the process proceeds to step S706, and a status notification command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 (status notification (first notification) is performed).

For example, when the lottery table shown in FIG. 15A is used in the status notification lottery in step S721, when the random number value (0 to 127) is 0 to 29, it is determined that the player has won, and when it is 30 to 127, it is determined that the player has won. Judged as non-winning (missing).

The status notification lottery is not limited to this example, and for example, the winning probability of the status notification lottery may be changed according to the number of games elapsed from the game in which the first bonus is applied. For example, when the lottery table shown in FIG. 15B is used in the status notification lottery in step S721, the number of elapsed games from the game that hits the first bonus (hereinafter referred to as the number of elapsed games) is 1G and is random. When the numerical value (0 to 127) is 0 to 9, it is determined to be won, when it is 10 to 127, it is determined to be non-winning (missing), the number of elapsed games is 2G, and the random number value (0 to 127) is. When it is 0 to 29, it is judged as winning, when it is 30 to 127, it is judged as non-winning (missing), and when the number of elapsed games is 3G or later and the random number value (0 to 127) is 0 to 63, it is judged as winning. The judgment may be made, and when it is 64 to 127, it may be judged as non-winning (missing), and after the status is notified, it may be judged as winning with a 100% probability. In addition, when the first bonus is hit, the status may be notified without fail.

In addition, the winning probability of the status notification lottery may be changed according to the internal winning combination (or winning combination) in the game. For example, when the lottery table shown in FIG. 15C is used in the status notification lottery in step S721, when the internal winning combination is a normal replay, it is determined that there is no winning (missing) with a 100% probability, and the internal winning combination is won. When the winning combination is a chance replay and the random number value (0 to 127) is 0 to 63, it is judged as winning, when it is 64 to 127, it is judged as non-winning (missing), and the internal winning combination is a bell and the random number value (0). ~ 127) is determined to be winning when 0 to 19, and is determined to be non-winning (missing) when it is 20 to 127, the internal winning combination is watermelon, and the random number value (0 to 127) is 0 to 39. Sometimes it is judged as winning, when it is 40 to 127, it is judged as non-winning (missing), when the internal winning combination is a weak cherry and the random number value (0 to 127) is 0 to 29, it is judged as winning, 30 When it is ~ 127, it may be determined as non-winning (missing), and when the internal winning combination is a strong cherry, it may be determined as winning with a 100% probability.

In addition, an example of performing a status notification lottery during the first bonus is shown. In addition, the status notification lottery is configured to be performed even during the precursor of the pseudo bonus, and is shown in FIG. 15 (d). As in the lottery table, the status notification lottery during the winning of the first bonus may be set so that the winning probability is higher than the status notification lottery during the precursor of the pseudo bonus.

For example, when the lottery table shown in FIG. 15D is used in the status notification lottery in step S721, when the random number value (0 to 127) is 0 to 63 before the internal notification, it is determined that the player has won, and 64 to 64 to When it is 127, it is judged as non-winning (missing), when the random number value (0 to 127) is 0 to 117, it is judged as winning, and when it is 117 to 127, it is judged as non-winning (missing). judge.

Further, when the random number value (0 to 127) is 0 to 9 in the pseudo-bonus precursor 16G to 9G, it is determined to be won, and when it is 10 to 127, it is determined to be non-winning (missing), and the pseudo-bonus precursor 8G to 4G. When the random number value (0 to 127) is in the numerical range of 0 to 19, it is determined to be won, and when it is 20 to 127, it is determined to be non-winning (missing), and the random value (0) is a pseudo-bonus precursor 3G to 1G. ~ 127) may be determined to be a winning when 0 to 39, and may be determined to be non-winning (missing) when 31 to 127.

Further, a lottery table may be created by combining a plurality or all of the number of elapsed games, the type of internal winning combination, the type of winning combination, and the gaming state (for example, during BB winning, pseudo-bonus precursor). Further, the number of precursor games of the pseudo-bonus may be determined by lottery before the internal notification using, for example, the precursor game number determination table and the random number value (0 to 127) shown in FIG. 15 (e).

<First notification / Example 3>
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the effects including the first notification according to the third embodiment in chronological order. In this example, when the first privilege (bonus in this example) is won in the state where the first notification for notifying that the player is in a certain state is executed, the first notification is performed in the first period. Is shown as an example of a game console that continuously executes.

<First notification / Example 3 / Normal medium → Certain state → Bonus winning → Bonus winning → Bonus end (end of certain state)>
In the state shown in FIG. 16A, the gaming state of the slot machine 100 is normal (re-game combination low probability state (RT1)), and the normal effect is executed by using the effect image display device 157.

In the state shown in FIG. 16 (b) that follows, the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY (in this example, watermelon symbol) -replay symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (weak cherry) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. In addition to winning the small role 3 (weak cherry), the effect image display device 157 is used to notify that the small role 3 (weak cherry) has been won (in this example, the effect in which the princess character appears). Is running.

In addition, here, by the lottery executed at the time of internal winning of the small role 3 (weak cherry), the game state is from normal (re-game role low probability state (RT1)) to AT preparation (re-game role high probability preparation state (re-game role high probability preparation state). With the winning of the lottery to shift to RT2)), the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) is generated with high probability. This "state in which the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability" is an example of the "certain state" according to the present invention.

In the state shown in FIG. 16 (c) that follows, the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY (in this example, watermelon symbol) -cherry symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 2 (strong cherry) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. In addition to winning the small role 2 (strong cherry), the effect image display device 157 is used to notify that the small role 2 (strong cherry) has been won (in this example, the effect in which the princess character appears). Is running. Further, in the game immediately after, the special role 1 is internally won, and the game state is shifted to the internal winning (special role internal winning game state (RT4)).

In the state shown in FIG. 16D, which follows, an interlocking effect suggesting the internal winning is performed with the internal winning of the special role 1 as an opportunity. Further, here, by winning the state notification lottery during the bonus, in the state notification process described with reference to FIG. 14, a certain state (in this example, the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) is high. The first notification (in this example, the state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is performed to notify that the character is in a state (a state that occurs with a probability).

In the state shown in FIG. 16 (e), the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the special combination 1 is won. Using the production image display device 157, a bonus confirmation notification (in this example, a production including the character display of "bonus confirmed !!" and the image of "Seven 1 design") is executed to notify that the special role 1 has been won. doing. Further, here, the gaming state is shifted to the bonus (special gaming state (RT5)) with the winning of the special role 1 as an opportunity.

In the state shown in FIG. 16 (f) that follows, the bonus has ended due to the payout of medals exceeding the specified number (300 in this example), and the effect image display device 157 is used to suggest the end of the bonus. The bonus end effect (in this example, the effect including the character display of "bonus end") is being executed.

Further, here, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is continued, and the game state is shifted to the normal state (re-game combination low probability state (RT1)). The state (a state in which the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) has ended.

<First notification / Example 3 / Bonus prize → Bonus prize → Bonus end → During ART (bonus prize)>
In the state shown in FIG. 16 (g) that follows, the symbol combination "watermelon symbol-watermelon-watermelon symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is won. At the same time, the effect image display device 157 is used to perform a winning effect (in this example, an effect in which a princess character appears) to notify that the small role 1 (watermelon) has been won. Further, in the game immediately after, the special role 1 is internally won, the game state is shifted to the internal winning (special role internal winning game state (RT4)), and the first notification (state notification including the display of a certain character) is performed. Since the special role 1 was internally elected during the continuation of ST), a certain state (a state in which the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) has ended, but the first notification (or The status notification ST) including the display of the character is being continued.

In the state shown in FIG. 16 (h) that follows, the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the special combination 1 is won. Using the production image display device 157, a bonus confirmation notification (in this example, a production including the character display of "bonus confirmed !!" and the image of "Seven 1 design") is executed to notify that the special role 1 has been won. doing.

Further, here, with the winning of the special role 1 as an opportunity, the game state is shifted to the bonus state (special game state (RT5)), and the AT lottery is performed every game. This "state in which the AT lottery is performed" is an example of the "certain state" according to the present invention.

The following state shown in FIG. 16 (i) is a state in which the bonus has ended due to the payout of medals exceeding the specified number (300 in this example), and the effect image display device 157 is used to indicate the end of the bonus. A notice suggesting that the bonus end effect (in this example, the effect including the character display of "bonus end") is executed and the game state is shifted to AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)). The production (in this example, the production including the characters "next ART") is being executed.

Further, here, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is continued, and the game state is shifted to AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)). A certain state (a state in which an AT lottery is performed) is being continued.

In the following state shown in FIG. 16 (j), while the AT is being prepared (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)), the special role 1 is internally elected, and the game state is being internally won (special role internal winning game state (RT4)). )), And the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) for notifying that a certain state (AT lottery is performed) is being continued.

The following state shown in FIG. 16 (k) shows the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-" corresponding to the special combination 1 on the effective line L1 during AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)). "Seven 1 symbol" is stopped and displayed, and the special role 1 is won, and the effect image display device 157 is used to notify that the special role 1 has been won (in this example, the characters "bonus confirmed"). Display and production including the image of "Seven 1 design") are being executed.

Further, here, in the wake of winning the special role 1, the gaming state is shifted to the bonus (special gaming state (RT5)), and at the same time, a certain state (AT lottery is performed) is notified. One notification (state notification ST including display of a certain character) is being continued.

In this example, when the first bonus is won while the first notification is being executed, the bonus is won in FIG. 16 (h) after the bonus is won in the first period (FIG. 16 (g)). To continue to execute the first notification in the period until the bonus is won and in the period from when the bonus is won in FIG. 16 (j) to when the bonus is won in FIG. 16 (k). In addition to not making the player uneasy in the first period, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by giving variation to the timing of the first notification. Further, since the first notification is performed in relation to the bonus, the new player is likely to continue the game until the first notification is performed, and the operating rate of the game console can be increased.

<First notification / Example 4>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the effects including the first notification according to the fourth embodiment in chronological order. In this example, when the first privilege (bonus in this example) is won in the state where the first notification for notifying that the player is in a certain state is executed, the first notification is performed in the first period. Is shown as an example of a game console that continuously executes. Since the states shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (f) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (f), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 17 (g), the symbol combination "watermelon symbol-watermelon-watermelon symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is won. , The effect image display device 157 is used to execute a winning effect (in this example, an effect in which a princess character appears) to notify that the small role 1 (watermelon) has been won. In addition, in the game immediately after, the pseudo-bonus is internally won, but when the pseudo-bonus is internally won, a certain state (in this example, the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability. The first notification (in this example, the state notification ST including the display of a certain character) for notifying that the character is in the state of being in the state is not performed.

In the state shown in FIG. 17 (h) that follows, the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 2 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the re-game combination 4 "is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. In addition to winning a prize, a pseudo-bonus confirmation notification (in this example, "bonus" is used to notify that the game state has shifted to the pseudo-bonus (re-game combination high probability state (RT3)) by using the effect image display device 157. The character display of "Confirm" and the production including the image of "Seven 2 design") are being executed.

In addition, here, it is notified that a certain state (a state in which the push order navigation of the small role 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability) is triggered by winning a prize (pseudo-bonus start) in the re-game combination 4 ″. The first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is started.

The following state shown in FIG. 17 (i) is a state in which the pseudo-bonus has ended, and the pseudo-bonus end effect suggesting the end of the pseudo-bonus using the effect image display device 157 (in this example, “pseudo-bonus end””. A notice effect (in this example, the character of "next ART") that suggests that the game state is shifted to AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)) while executing the effect including the character display of The production including) is being executed. Further, here, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) is continued, and the game state is shifted to AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2)). A certain state (a state in which an AT lottery is performed) is being continued.

The state shown in FIG. 17 (j) following is a state in which the pseudo bonus is internally won during AT preparation (replaying combination high probability preparation state (RT2)), and the state shown in FIG. 17 (k) following is a pseudo state. It is the state after winning the bonus. Here, in the game after the pseudo-bonus is won, the first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) for notifying that a certain state (AT lottery is performed) is continued.

In this example, when the pseudo bonus (second bonus) is won while the first notification is being executed, after the pseudo bonus is won in the second period (FIG. 17 (j)), FIG. 17 (FIG. 17 (j) Since the first notification is continuously executed in the period until the pseudo bonus is won in k), the player is not anxious even in the second period, and the timing of the first notification is not reached. It is possible to enhance the fun of the game by giving variations to.

<First notification / modification example>
Next, a modified example of the first notification will be described. In the above embodiment, in the game (a certain game) in which the special role 1 is won, an example in which the bonus confirmation notification and the first notification are performed is shown, but the "certain game" according to the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. If the game is a game in which a bonus is started, the player's expectation can be further increased by matching the start timing of the bonus with the start timing of the game.

FIG. 18A is a diagram showing a modified example of the notification timing of the first notification, and the state shown in FIGS. 18A and 1) is a game (a certain game) in which the special role 1 is won. be. In this example, in this certain game, the effect image display device 157 is used to notify the bonus confirmation (in this example, the effect including the character display of "bonus confirmed !!"), but at this timing, The first notification (in this example, the state notification ST including the display of a certain character) for notifying that the player is in a certain state (in this example, the state in which the AT lottery is performed) is not performed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 18 (a) and 18 (2) to (a) and (4) are the next games of the game (a certain game) that has won the special role 1. In this example, in this "game next to a certain game", at the timing when the operation of the first stop is accepted, the effect image display device 157 is used to indicate that the player is in a certain state (a state in which the AT lottery is performed). The first notification (state notification ST including the display of a certain character) to be notified has been started.

In this example, the first notification is performed at the timing when the first stop operation is received, but the operation by other operation means (for example, the operation by the start lever 135 (lever on), the operation of the second stop, etc. The first notification may be started at the timing when the third stop operation) is received or when another process (for example, the winning determination process or the medal granting process shown in FIG. 7) is executed.

As described above, if the first notification is a notification that is started in connection with the operation of the player in a certain game, the timing of the first notification can be further varied, and each operation. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

<AT (pseudo bonus) rush replay stop display / transformation example>
Next, a modified example of the stop display of the AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay will be described. In the above embodiment, when the symbol combination "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 2 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" corresponding to the AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, the game state is in the pseudo-bonus (re-). Although an example of shifting to the game combination high probability state (RT3)) has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this.

18 (b) and (1) are diagrams showing an example in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and FIGS. 18 (b) and (2) are AT (pseudo-bonus). It is a figure which showed the example which the symbol combination corresponding to a rush replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the symbol combination corresponding to a special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effect line L2. In the reels shown in FIGS. 18B to 18D, a symbol arrangement different from the symbol arrangement described with reference to FIG. 3 is adopted.

In this example, when the symbol combination "white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol" corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effective line L1, the special combination 1 is won. On the other hand, when the symbol combination "white 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-red 7 symbol" corresponding to the AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effective line L1, the AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay is performed. Along with winning the prize, the symbol combination "white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol" corresponding to the special role 1 is stopped and displayed on the lower production line L2. The production line L2 may be used as an effective line, or other winning lines may be used as an effective line.

In this way, in the first bonus, a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the first line, and in the second bonus, the certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the second line different from the first line. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to visually distinguish between the bonus winning and the pseudo-bonus winning.

18 (c) and (1) are diagrams showing an example in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 and a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effect line L3. (C) and (2) are diagrams showing an example in which the symbol combination corresponding to the AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 and a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the effect line L3.

In this example, when the symbol combination "replay symbol-white 7 symbol-cherry symbol" corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effective line L1, the special combination 1 is won and a certain symbol combination is obtained. "White 7 symbol-White 7 symbol-White 7 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the effect line L3 in the middle row. On the other hand, when the symbol combination "bell symbol-white 7 symbol-watermelon symbol" corresponding to the AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effective line L1, the AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay is won. At the same time, a certain symbol combination "white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the effect line L3 in the middle row.

In this way, if the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on at least a certain line in the first bonus and the second bonus, it is possible to make it difficult to visually distinguish between the bonus winning and the pseudo bonus winning. , It is possible to draw the player's attention to the first notification and maintain the player's expectation until the first notification is performed. Although it is difficult to instantly determine the type of bonus, it is possible to grasp the difference between the types, so that important information for the player can be reliably conveyed.

18 (d) and (1) are diagrams showing an example in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and FIGS. 18 (d) and (2) are freeze effects (reel actions). ), Then the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and then the symbol combination corresponding to the AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. It is a figure which showed.

In this example, in the winning of the special winning combination 1, the symbol combination "white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol" corresponding to the special winning combination 1 is stopped and displayed on the upward-sloping effective line L1. On the other hand, in the winning of the AT (pseudo-bonus) rush replay, after performing the freeze effect (reel action) by the reels 110 to 112, the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 "white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol-white 7 symbol" Is temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 (temporary stop display), and then the symbol combination "white 7 symbol-red 7 symbol-white 7 symbol" corresponding to AT (pseudo bonus) rush replay is effective ascending to the right. A stop display is displayed on the line L1.

In this way, if the freeze effect (reel action) is performed in at least one of the first bonus and the second bonus, the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels. (For example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), a stop operation means capable of executing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and An internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A) that determines the result of the internal winning based on the lottery value, the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the above. A stop result deriving means for deriving a stop result of the plurality of reels based on the result of an operation of the stop operation means (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 7A) and a certain state (for example, FIG. 4). A game state of any one of the plurality of types of game states (RT1 to RT5) shown, a state in which the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability, and a certain notice (for example, a setting after the end of the bonus). The first notification (for example, the state notification shown in FIGS. 12 and 13) for notifying that a state in which a value suggestion) is likely to appear or a state in which a special effect (for example, a premier effect) may appear). The game console is provided with a notification means (for example, the state notification process shown in FIG. 9 and the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) capable of executing ST), and the internal winning result determination means is , The first winning combination can be determined as a result of the internal winning, and the first winning combination is the first privilege (for example, special role 1 (big bonus), special role 2 (regular bonus)). , AT, AT addition, etc.) (For example, special role 1 (single), special role 2 (single), special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, special role 1 + replay role 2, special It is a combination 1 + a re-game combination 3), and the notification means is a period from the winning of the first privilege to the end of the first privilege (hereinafter, referred to as a “first period”, for example, FIG. The first notification is not executed during at least a part of the period from the special role 1 prize (bonus prize) shown in 12 (h) to the end of the bonus shown in FIG. 12 (l). Is the period from the bonus winning shown in FIG. 12 (m) to the end of the bonus when the first privilege is won while the first notification is being executed. ) Is a means for continuously executing the first notification (hereinafter, "the present application"). It may be called "Invention 1").

According to the game console according to the invention 1 of the present application, when the first privilege is won in the state where the first notification is executed, the first notification is continuously executed in the first period. In addition to not making the player uneasy in one period, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by giving variation to the timing of the first notification. Further, since the first notification is performed in relation to the privilege, the new player is likely to continue the game until the first notification is performed, and the operating rate of the game table can be increased.

Further, the internal winning result determining means is a means capable of determining a second winning combination as a result of the internal winning, and the second winning combination is a second privilege (for example, AT (pseudo-bonus)). (For example, re-gaming combination 4, re-gaming combination 4', re-gaming combination 4'), and the notification means ends after the second privilege is won. (Hereinafter referred to as "second period"; for example, the period from the pseudo-bonus winning shown in FIG. 13 (g) to the end of the pseudo-bonus shown in FIG. 13 (j)) until at least a part of the period (for example, It is a means for executing the first notification during all periods), and the notification means is used in the second period when the second privilege is won while the first notification is being executed. It may be a means for continuously executing the first notification.

With such a configuration, the player will not be anxious even in the second period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced by giving a variation to the timing of the first notification.

Further, the first privilege and the second privilege have different types of benefits (for example, ball ejection performance (for example, the number of game media paid out, the number of RT-added games, the probability of AT entry, the number of games that can enter AT). ) Are different, the additional performance (for example, the number of RT additional games, the winning probability of RT addition) is different, and the production mode (for example, the display frequency and display mode of the RT additional production) are different. The privilege of the above and the second privilege may have different degrees of advantage to the player. For example, the first privilege may be a privilege in which the first lottery (ART rush lottery) is performed, and the second privilege may be a privilege in which the second lottery (art additional lottery) is performed. .. Further, the first privilege is a privilege in which the first effect (effect suggesting that the bonus is in progress) is performed, and the second privilege suggests that the second effect (AT is in progress). It may be a privilege that the production) is performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by increasing the variation of benefits.

Further, the first notification performed in connection with the first privilege and the first notification performed in relation to the second privilege may be notifications of the same notification mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the type of privilege from the notification mode of the first notification, and it is possible to increase the motivation to play.

Further, the first notification performed in connection with the second privilege is internally contained in a certain game (for example, a game in which a bonus is won, a next game after winning a bonus, or a special role during a bonus game). A lottery game, a game when it is performed in connection with a production during a bonus game, a game that wins a lottery during a bonus game or a lottery according to a winning combination, a game that exceeds a predetermined number of game media to be paid out, or When a notification (for example, an operation by the start lever 135 (lever on), a second stop operation, or a third stop operation is accepted) that is started in connection with the player's operation in a game in which the above conditions are satisfied). It may be a notification to be started, a notification to be started by executing a winning determination process or a medal granting process after the third stop).

With such a configuration, it is possible to give more variation to the timing of the first notification, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for each operation.

Further, the certain game may be a game in which the second privilege is started, or a game in which the second privilege wins a prize.

With such a configuration, the player's expectation can be further increased by matching the start timing of the privilege with the start timing of a certain game.

Further, the certain game is a game started when a certain condition is satisfied in the second privilege, and the certain condition uses a lottery (for example, the lottery table shown in FIG. 15A). The status notification lottery, the status notification lottery according to the number of games elapsed from the game that hit the first bonus, using the lottery table shown in FIG. 15 (b), and the lottery table shown in FIG. 15 (c) are used. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the player wins the internal winning combination (or the winning combination) in the game. The above-mentioned "certain condition" may be satisfied when the number of games predetermined in the second privilege has elapsed, or the number of game media paid out exceeds a certain number in the second privilege. It may be established in some cases.

With such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the first notification even during the privilege, and the motivation to play can be maintained.

Further, at least one of the first privilege and the second privilege may be a pseudo bonus.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by increasing the variation of benefits.

Further, the second privilege is a pseudo bonus, and the second privilege constitutes a part of a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the first privilege is being executed during the execution of the second privilege. It is possible to execute a lottery regarding the award of the above, and it may be possible to start the first award before the end of the second award.

With such a configuration, it can be expected that the first privilege will start during the pseudo-bonus, and by performing the first notification during this period, the player will pay attention to the first notification even during the privilege. , Can increase the motivation to play.

Further, during the execution of the first privilege, a lottery (for example, AT lottery) capable of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player (for example, AT preparation (re-game combination high probability preparation state (RT2))) is executed. It is possible, and the first notification may be executed when the lottery is won.

With such a configuration, it can be expected that the player will shift to another advantageous gaming state during the first privilege, and by performing the first notification during this period, the player will be the first during the privilege. It is possible to increase the motivation to play by paying attention to the notification of.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels (for example, FIG. Based on the reels 110 to 112) shown in 1 and the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of executing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a lottery value. The internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A), the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the stop operating means. A stop result deriving means (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 7A) for deriving the stop results of the plurality of reels based on the result of the operation, and a certain state (for example, a plurality of types shown in FIG. 4). Any one of the game states (RT1 to RT5), a state in which the push order navigation of the small winning combination 4 (bell) occurs with a high probability, a certain notice (for example, suggestion of a set value after the end of the bonus). Executes the first notification (for example, the state notification ST shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) to notify that is in a state in which is likely to appear, or in a state in which a special effect (for example, a premier effect) may appear). A game console including a possible notification means (for example, the state notification process shown in FIG. 9, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2), and the internal winning result determining means is the internal winning. As a result, the first winning combination can be determined, and the first winning combination is the first privilege (for example, special role 1 (big bonus), special role 2 (regular bonus), AT, AT. Winning combination (for example, special role 1 (single), special role 2 (single), special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, special role 1 + replay role 2, special role 1 + replay The function 3), and the notification means is a period from the winning of the first privilege to the winning of the first privilege (hereinafter, referred to as “first period”. For example, FIG. 16 (c)). The first notification is not executed during at least a part of the period from the special role 1 internal winning (bonus winning) shown in FIG. 16 (e) to the bonus winning, and the notification means is When the first privilege is won while the first notification is being executed, the bonus winning is shown in FIG. 16 (h) from the bonus reel shown in FIG. 16 (g). In the period up to, or from the bonus reel shown in FIG. 16 (j) to the bonus winning shown in FIG. 16 (k)) It is a game console (hereinafter, may be referred to as "invention 2 of the present application"), which is a means for continuously executing the first notification.

According to the game console according to the second invention of the present application, when the first privilege is won while the first notification is being executed, the first notification is continuously executed in the first period. In addition to not making the player uneasy in one period, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by giving variation to the timing of the first notification. Further, since the first notification is performed in relation to the privilege, the new player is likely to continue the game until the first notification is performed, and the operating rate of the game table can be increased.

Further, the internal winning result determining means is a means capable of determining a second winning combination as a result of the internal winning, and the second winning combination is a second privilege (for example, AT (pseudo-bonus)). (For example, re-gaming combination 4, re-gaming combination 4', re-gaming combination 4'), and the notification means wins the second benefit after the second benefit is won. (Hereinafter referred to as "second period"; for example, the period from the pseudo-bonus winning shown in FIG. 13 (g) to the end of the pseudo-bonus shown in FIG. 13 (j)) until at least a part of the period (for example, It is a means for executing the first notification during all periods), and the notification means is used in the second period when the second privilege is won while the first notification is being executed. It may be a means for continuously executing the first notification.

With such a configuration, the player will not be anxious even in the second period, and the interest of the game can be enhanced by giving a variation to the timing of the first notification.

Further, the first privilege and the second privilege have different types of benefits (for example, ball ejection performance (for example, the number of game media paid out, the number of RT-added games, the probability of AT entry, the number of games that can enter AT). ) May be different, the additional performance (for example, the number of RT-added games, the winning probability of RT-added) is different, and the effect mode (for example, the display frequency and display mode of the RT-added effect) are different). For example, the first privilege may be a privilege in which the first lottery (ART rush lottery) is performed, and the second privilege may be a privilege in which the second lottery (art additional lottery) is performed. .. Further, the first privilege is a privilege in which the first effect (effect suggesting that the bonus is in progress) is performed, and the second privilege suggests that the second effect (AT is in progress). It may be a privilege that the production) is performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by increasing the variation of benefits.

Further, the first notification performed in connection with the first privilege and the first notification performed in relation to the second privilege may be notifications of the same notification mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the type of privilege from the notification mode of the first notification, and it is possible to increase the motivation to play.

In addition, the first notification performed in connection with the second privilege is won in a certain game (for example, a game in which a bonus is won, a next game after winning a bonus, and various lottery during the bonus. A notification (for example, an operation by the start lever 135 (lever on), a second stop operation, or a third stop operation) that is started in connection with the player's operation in the game that has been played or a game in which a certain condition is satisfied). It may be a notification started when it is accepted, a notification started by executing a winning determination process or a medal granting process after the third stop).

With such a configuration, it is possible to give more variation to the timing of the first notification, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for each operation.
Further, the certain game may be a game in which a certain winning combination is won.

With such a configuration, the player's expectation can be further increased by matching the timing at which a certain winning combination is won with the timing at which a certain game is started.

Further, the certain game is a game started when a certain condition is satisfied during the internal winning of the second privilege, and the certain condition is shown in a lottery (for example, FIG. 15A). Status notification lottery using a lottery table, status notification lottery according to the number of games elapsed from the game that hit the first bonus using the lottery table shown in FIG. 15 (b), shown in FIG. 15 (c). It may be a condition that is satisfied when the player wins the internal winning combination (or the winning combination) in the game using the lottery table. The above-mentioned "certain condition" may be satisfied when the number of games predetermined in the second privilege has elapsed, or the number of game media paid out exceeds a certain number in the second privilege. It may be established in some cases.

With such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the first notification even during the internal winning of the privilege, and the motivation to play can be maintained.

Further, at least one of the first privilege and the second privilege may be a pseudo bonus.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by increasing the variation of benefits.

Further, the second privilege is a pseudo bonus, and the second privilege constitutes a part of a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the first privilege is being executed during the execution of the second privilege. It is possible to execute a lottery regarding the award of the above, and it may be possible to start the first award before the end of the second award.

With such a configuration, it can be expected that the first privilege will start during the pseudo-bonus, and by performing the first notification during this period, the player will pay attention to the first notification even during the privilege. , Can increase the motivation to play. Further, the first notification may be executed during the game of the first privilege or the game of the second privilege.

The "notifying means" according to the present invention may be any means that can execute the first notifying that the person is in a certain state, and may not perform the first notifying.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the end trigger of the "certain state", the end of AT, the elapse of a predetermined period, the winning of a certain lottery, and the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state. As illustrated, for example, when a condition regarding the interest of the player is satisfied (for example, when a predetermined number of games has elapsed, or when the number of games to be paid out exceeds a predetermined number, after the first notification is given. The "certain state" may be terminated when the predetermined number of bonuses has been exhausted, or when the conditions related to the production are satisfied (for example, when the production lottery is won and a certain production is performed, the production is performed in advance. The "certain state" may be terminated after the production is performed a predetermined number of times or for a specified period of time.

Further, the notification mode of the "first notification" is not limited to the display by the effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display device), but is by an optical output means such as an LED or a lamp (for example, the notification lamp 123 shown in FIG. 1). It may be notified by light (for example, lighting, blinking, extinguishing), or by sound (for example, sound effect, music) by a sound output means such as a speaker (for example, speakers 272,277 shown in FIG. 2). It may be a notification by movement (for example, rotation, expansion / contraction, vibration, advance / retreat) by a movable body (for example, the reels 110 to 112 and the shutter 163 shown in FIG. 1). Further, the "first notification" may be controlled by the main control unit 300 or the first sub control unit 400. Further, the first notification (false notification) may be performed when the state is not in a certain state (when the state is other than a certain state).

Further, the "first privilege" and the "second privilege" according to the present invention are not limited to the special role 1 (big bonus), the special role 2 (regular bonus), AT, AT addition, etc. Suggestions, payout of game media, execution of special effects, granting of items, etc. may be performed.

Further, the "first privilege" and the "second privilege" according to the present invention do not have to be one type each, and at least one of the privileges may be composed of a plurality of types of privileges. For example, the first privilege may be composed of a big bonus and a regular bonus, and the notification mode of the "first notification" may be different in each bonus.

Further, the first notification performed in connection with the first privilege may be a notification started in connection with the operation of the player in a certain game, and the certain game may be the first notification. It may be a game in which one privilege is started. Further, the certain game is a game that is started when a certain condition is satisfied in the first privilege, and the certain condition may be a condition that is satisfied when a lottery is won.

Further, the notification means may not execute the first notification during at least a part of the period from the winning of the first privilege to the end of the first privilege. May be good. Further, the notification means may not execute the first notification during at least a part of the period from the winning of the first privilege to the winning of the first privilege. May be good.

In addition, the notification means is used for at least a part of the period from the winning of the first privilege to the end of the first privilege (hereinafter referred to as "first period"). This is a means that does not execute the notification of the above, and the notification means is the first, after the first privilege is won, when the first privilege is won while the first notification is being executed. It is a means for continuously executing the first notification in the period until the end of the privilege (hereinafter referred to as "third period"), and the first period and the third period are different periods. It may be.

In addition, the notification means is used for at least a part of the period from the winning of the first privilege to the winning of the first privilege (hereinafter referred to as the "first period"). This is a means that does not execute the notification of the above, and the notification means is the first, after the first privilege is won, when the first privilege is won while the first notification is being executed. It is a means for continuously executing the first notification in the period until the privilege is won (hereinafter referred to as "third period"), and the first period and the third period are different periods. It may be.

<< Embodiment 2 >>
Next, the game console (slot machine) according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 41. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, only the configuration different from the slot machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described below.

<Types of winning roles>
First, with reference to FIG. 19, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine according to the second embodiment will be described. Note that FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations) of the slot machine according to the second embodiment, the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts of each winning combination, and the like.

The winning combination of the slot machine according to the second embodiment includes a special role 1 and a special role 2 (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as a "special role"), and a re-game combination 1 to a re-game combination 3 (hereinafter referred to as "special role"). , These may be collectively referred to as "replaying combination"), and small combination 1 to small combination 4 (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "small combination").

<Types of winning roles / special roles>
The special role 1 is a role (operating role) that shifts to the big bonus in the special gaming state shown in FIG. 20 by winning, and the special role 2 shifts to the regular bonus in the special gaming state shown in FIG. 20 by winning. It is a role (acting role). However, no medals will be paid out for winning the role itself.

In this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1) is "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol". Further, the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 2 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 2) is "BAR symbol-BAR symbol-BAR symbol".

When the special combination is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this combination is set to on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning combination internal winning gaming state shown in FIG. This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, in the game in which the special role is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combinations corresponding to the special role will be aligned on the effective line. It will be easy to win a prize.

Specifically, when the special role 1 is internally won and the game state shifts to the special role internal winning game state, the special combination 1 compatible symbol combination (in this example, Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol). It is possible to win a prize, and the special combination internal winning game state is maintained (carried over) until the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line. In addition, when the special role 2 is internally won and the game state shifts to the special role internal winning game state, it is possible to win a special combination 2 compatible symbol combination (BAR symbol-BAR symbol-BAR symbol in this example). The special combination internal winning game state is maintained (carried over) until the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the valid line.

<Types of winning roles / replaying roles>
The re-game combination (re-game combination 1 to re-game combination 3) is a winning combination (operating role) that allows the player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize. No payouts will be made. In addition, the re-game combination 2 and 3 are roles that shift to the re-game combination high probability preparation state shown in FIG. 20 by winning a prize. Hereinafter, the replay role 1 may be referred to as "replay", the replay role 2 may be referred to as "chance replay 1", and the replay role 3 may be referred to as "chance replay 2".

The re-gaming role may be a role in which the player can play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when a prize is won in the re-game role, the medal may be automatically inserted in the next game, or the medal inserted in the game in which the re-game role is won may be carried over to the next game as it is. It may be something that can be used. In this example, the corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. 19, but it goes without saying that the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combination are not limited to the symbol combinations shown in FIG.

Of the symbol combinations "blank symbol (or replay symbol) -replay symbol-blank symbol (or cherry symbol)" corresponding to the replay combination 2, "blank symbol (or replay symbol)" is stopped and displayed. It indicates that the symbol to be displayed may be a "blank symbol" or a "replay symbol", and in the "blank symbol (or cherry symbol)", the symbol to be stopped and displayed is a "blank symbol" or a "cherry symbol". It shows that it is good.

Of the symbol combinations "Seven 1 symbol (or BAR symbol or watermelon symbol) -replay symbol-watermelon symbol" corresponding to the replay combination 3, "Seven 1 symbol (or BAR symbol or watermelon symbol)" Indicates that the symbol to be stopped and displayed may be any one of "Seven 1 symbol", "BAR symbol", and "watermelon symbol".

<Types of winning roles / small roles>
The small role (small role 1 to small role 4) is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and thereafter, the small role 1 is "watermelon", the small role 2 is "strong cherry", and the small role 3 May be called "weak cherry" and small role 4 may be called "bell". The corresponding symbol combinations and the number of payouts are as shown in FIG. In addition, "ANY" in the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY-cherry symbol (or watermelon symbol)" corresponding to the small winning combination 2 and the symbol combination "cherry symbol-ANY-replay symbol" corresponding to the small winning combination 3. Indicates that the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be any symbol.

In addition, among the symbol combinations "cherry symbol-ANY-cherry symbol (or watermelon symbol)" corresponding to the small role 2, the "cherry symbol (or watermelon symbol)" is stopped and displayed as the "cherry symbol". Or, it indicates that the "watermelon pattern" may be used.

<Type of game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 20 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine according to the second embodiment.

The slot machines according to the second embodiment can be roughly classified into a re-game combination low-probability state, a re-game combination high-probability preparation state (AT state), a re-game combination low-probability state (pull-back zone), and a special role internal winning game. There are a total of five gaming states, a state and a special gaming state. In addition, the transition conditions (A) to (I) of each gaming state are described in the figure, and when the transition conditions (A) to (I) described in each arrow are satisfied, the direction of the arrow is reached. The game state changes (details will be described later). The contents of the re-game combination low probability state (normal), the special role internal winning game state, and the special game state, and the transition conditions (A), (D) to (F) will be described with reference to FIG. Since it is the same as the content described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Replaying role high probability state (AT state)>
The re-game combination high probability state (AT state) is a so-called "AT in progress" state, and is a re-game combination rather than the re-game combination low probability state (normal) and the re-game combination low probability preparation state (pull-back zone). It is a gaming state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the internal winning probability of 1 is high. Hereinafter, the re-game combination high probability state (AT state) may be simply referred to as an “AT state”.

In the re-game combination high probability state (AT state), if the specified number of games (the number of games fluctuates) is exhausted and there is a return to the AT state (when the transition condition (I) is satisfied), the game is replayed. It shifts to the game role low probability state (pullback zone). In addition, when the specified number of games (the number of games fluctuates) is exhausted and there is no return to the AT state (when the transition condition (H1) is satisfied), or the specified number of games (the number of games fluctuates). When the limiter of the counter is activated (when the transition condition (H2) is satisfied), the game shifts to the re-game combination low probability state (normal). Here, the limiter of the counter operates in the present embodiment (the transition condition (H2) is satisfied) when the number of payouts of the game medium reaches the upper limit (3000 or 2000 in the present embodiment). Alternatively, it is a case where the advantageous section reaches a certain number of games (1500 G in this embodiment).

<Low probability state of replay role (pullback zone)>
The re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone) is a gaming state in which it is possible to shift to the re-game combination high probability state (AT state) when a predetermined winning combination is won, and the re-game combination low probability state (AT state). It is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the state (normal).

In the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone), when the small role 2 (strong cherry) is won (when the transition condition (J) is satisfied), the re-game combination shifts to the high probability state (AT state) (returns). ), And when the specified number of games (the number of games fluctuates) is exhausted (when the transition condition (K) is satisfied), the game shifts to the re-game combination low probability state (normal). In addition, when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won (when the transition condition (D) is satisfied), the game shifts to the special role internal winning game state.

In this example, the low probability state (pull-back zone) of the replaying combination is 1G (game) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "pull-back 1G"), but before the pull-back 1G, a CZ consisting of one or more games. (Chance zone) may be added. Here, the CZ (chance zone) is a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state (replaying combination high probability state (AT state)), and is a second state (replaying combination low probability state). (Pull-back zone)) pull-back 1G, and a state more advantageous to the player than the third state (re-game combination low probability state (normal)).

<Status notification processing>
Next, the state notification process (step S401) in the effect control process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the state notification process according to the second embodiment.

In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the state flag stored in the RAM 408 is off, and if it is on (during AT), the process proceeds to step S1006, and if it is off (during non-AT), the process proceeds to step S1006. The process proceeds to step S1002. In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the slot machine has started a certain state, and if not applicable, the state notification process is terminated, and if the slot machine has started a certain state, the process proceeds to step S1004. Here, the "certain state" according to the present invention includes, for example, a gaming state of any one of the plurality of types of gaming states described with reference to FIG. 20, or a special effect (for example, a premier effect). Conditions that may appear are included.

In step S1004, the state status flag is set to on because a certain state has been started, and in the next step S1005, the status notification process is terminated after setting the notification end command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500. ..

In step S1006, when the bonus ends and there is no return (pull back) to the AT state (when the transition condition (F) shown in FIG. 20 is satisfied), or when the AT state ends and the AT state ends. It is determined whether or not any of the cases where there is no return (pull back) to (pull back) (when the transition condition (H1) shown in FIG. 20 is satisfied) is met, and if any of the cases is met, the process proceeds to step S1009. If none of the above applies, the process proceeds to step S1007. In step S1009, since there is no return (pull back) to the AT state, a notification end command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 is set, and in the next step S1010, the state notification is made after the state flag is set to off. End the process.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the AT state has ended, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1008, and if not applicable, the state notification process ends. In step S1008, whether or not the limiter of the counter has been activated (whether or not the upper limit of the number of game media to be paid out (3000 or 2000 in this example) has been reached, or whether or not the advantageous section has a certain number of games (this). In the example, whether or not 1500G) has been reached) is determined, and if applicable (when the transition condition (H2) shown in FIG. 20 is satisfied), there is no return (pull back) to the AT state. The process proceeds to step S1009, and if not applicable, the status notification process is terminated.

<Embodiment 2-1>
Next, a specific example of the effect according to the first embodiment of the second embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of various lottery tables for executing the effect according to the first embodiment of the second embodiment. In this example, an example in which the same lottery table is used in settings 1 to 6 will be described, but at least one lottery table having different winning probabilities may be prepared for each set value.

<Embodiment 2-1 / AT return lottery table>
The AT return lottery table shown in FIG. 22A is a lottery table to be referred to when performing the “AT return lottery”, and in this example, lottery data is stored corresponding to each of a plurality of types of winning combinations. There is. Here, the "AT return lottery" is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift (return) the gaming state to the AT state. In this example, in the first sub-control unit 400, a random number value (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from a random number value generation circuit or the like is used as a winning combination in 1G (pull-back zone) or the like after the end of AT. It is determined whether the lottery value is the associated winning lottery value or the winning lottery value, and the process of determining the winning or losing (non-winning) of the AT return lottery is executed.

For example, since the lottery value corresponding to the normal replay and bell (or loss) is 0, the winning probability of the AT return lottery when winning the normal replay and bell (or loss) is 0% (=). Since it is 0/65536) and the winning lottery value corresponding to the chance replay is 5536, the winning probability of the AT return lottery when winning the chance replay is 5536/65536. Further, since the lottery value of the winning corresponding to the watermelon and the weak cherry is 15536, the winning probability of the AT return lottery when the watermelon and the weak cherry are won is 15536/65536, which corresponds to the strong cherry (or bonus). Since the lottery value of the winning lottery is 65536, the winning probability of the AT return lottery when winning a strong cherry (or bonus) is 100% (= 65536/65536).

<Embodiment 2-1 / Normal AT precursor game number determination table>
The normal AT precursor game number determination table shown in FIG. 22B shows that when the condition for transitioning from the replay low probability state (normal) to the replay high probability state (AT state) is satisfied, the “AT precursor game number” is set. It is a lottery table to be referred to when "decision lottery" is performed, and in this example, lottery data is stored corresponding to the number of precursor games of 9 to 16. Here, the "AT precursor game number determination lottery" is a lottery for determining the number of games for which an AT precursor effect (including a fake effect (gase effect)) that suggests that the game state shifts to the AT state is performed. Is.

In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a random number value from a random number value generation circuit or the like when the condition for shifting from the replay low probability state (normal) to the replay high probability state (AT state) is satisfied. (In this example, 0 to 127) is determined to be the lottery value associated with which precursor game number, and a process of determining the number of games for which the AT precursor effect is performed is executed. For example, since the lottery values for winning corresponding to the number of precursor games of 9 to 16 are all 16, the winning probability of each of the number of precursor games of 9 to 16 is 16/128.

<Embodiment 2-1 / AT precursor game number determination table at the time of pullback>
The table for determining the number of AT precursor games at the time of pulling back shown in FIG. 22C shows that when the condition for shifting (returning) from the low probability replay state (pullback zone) to the high probability replay state (AT state) is satisfied, It is a lottery table to be referred to when performing "AT precursor game number determination lottery", and in this example, lottery data is stored corresponding to the precursor game number of 0 or 1. Here, the "AT precursor game number determination lottery" is a lottery for determining the number of games for which an AT precursor effect (including a fake effect (gase effect)) that suggests that the game state shifts to the AT state is performed. Is.

In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is a disorder acquired from a random number value generation circuit or the like when the condition for shifting from the re-game low probability state (pull-back zone) to the re-game high probability state (AT state) is satisfied. It is determined which number of precursor games the numerical value (0 to 127 in this example) is the lottery value associated with, and the process of determining the number of games for which the AT precursor effect is performed is executed. For example, since the lottery value of the winning corresponding to the number of precursor games of 0 (1 stop) is 32, the winning probability of the number of precursor games of 0 (1 stop) is 32/128, which is a precursor of 1 (input). Since the winning lottery value corresponding to the number of games is 16, the winning probability of the number of precursor games of 1 (input) is 16/128.

Note that 0 (1 stop) means that the AT precursor effect is performed until the reception of the first stop operation of the game in which the lottery for determining the number of AT precursor games (hereinafter referred to as the game) is performed, and 0 (2 stops) is , Indicates that the AT precursor effect is performed until the reception of the second stop operation of the game, and 0 (3 stops, winning judgment) indicates that the AT precursor effect is performed until the reception of the third stop operation of the game. There is. Further, 1 (input) indicates that the AT precursor effect is performed until the acceptance of the bet operation of the next game (hereinafter, the next game) of the game, and 1 (lever) indicates that the start lever operation of the next game is performed. It indicates that the AT precursor production will be performed until the reception. In the game corresponding to 0G, the so-called "push order navigation" that suggests the operation order of the operation means related to the bell is not generated.

In this example, the number of games (0 or 1 in this example) of the precursory effect to be performed when the condition for shifting from the re-game low probability state (pull-back zone) to the re-game high probability state (AT state) is satisfied is re-played. It is set to be less than the number of games (9 to 16 in this example) of the precursory effect to be performed when the condition for shifting from the low-probability game state (normal) to the high-probability re-game state (AT state) is satisfied.

<Embodiment 2-1 / AT return lottery table during non-advantageous section>
The AT return lottery table in the non-advantageous section shown in FIG. 22D is a lottery table to be referred to when performing the "AT return lottery" in the non-advantageous section (for example, the re-game combination low probability state (normal)). , In this example, the lottery data of the loss is stored corresponding to each of all the winning combinations (including the loss). Here, the "AT return lottery" is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to the AT state. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT is not returned to the AT in the pullback zone after the AT is completed, the section shifts from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. Further, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section is configured to start from the next game in which some small winning combination other than the loss is won in the game in the non-advantageous section.

In the non-advantageous section, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the AT return lottery (non-winning) regardless of the random number value (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like. To execute. That is, the non-advantageous section is a section (state) in which the AT return lottery is not won. In addition, the AT lottery itself may not be performed in the non-advantageous section. Further, when the power is turned on including the setting change (change to the same setting), it is configured to always start from the non-advantageous section.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Non-advantageous section time production game number table>
The production game number table in the non-advantageous section shown in FIG. 22 (e) is a lottery table to be referred to when the “lottery for determining the number of production games” is performed in the non-advantageous section, and in this example, 0 (no production) or 1 Lottery data is stored corresponding to the number of production games (single production). Here, the "lottery for determining the number of production games" is a lottery for determining the number of games for which a special production suggesting the establishment of a chance combination is performed.

In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 determines which number of production games the random number value (0 to 127 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like is the lottery value associated with. Then, the process of determining the number of games to be produced is executed. For example, since the winning lottery value corresponding to 0 (no production) is 64, the winning probability of 0 (no production) is 64/128, and the winning lottery value corresponding to 1 (single production) is 64. Therefore, the winning probability of 1 (single-shot production) is 64/128. Here, no production means that no production is performed.

<Additional lottery table during Embodiment 2-1 / AT>
The additional lottery table during AT shown in FIG. 22F is a lottery table to be referred to when performing the “additional lottery during AT”, and in this example, lottery data is stored corresponding to each of a plurality of types of winning combinations. Has been done. Here, the "additional lottery during AT" is a lottery for determining whether or not to add (add) the number of games in the AT state when the game state is the AT state. In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 receives a random number value (0 to 63335 in this example) obtained from a random number value generation circuit or the like when a certain condition is satisfied during the AT state (for example, for each game). ) Is the winning lottery value or the out-of-lot lottery value associated with each winning combination, and the process of determining the winning or losing (non-winning) of the additional lottery during AT. Run.

For example, since the lottery value of the winning corresponding to the normal replay and the bell (or the loss) is 0, the winning probability of the additional lottery during AT when the normal replay and the bell (or the loss) are won is 0% ( = 0/65536), and the winning lottery value corresponding to the chance replay is 15536. Therefore, when the chance replay is won, the winning probability of the additional lottery during AT is 15536/65536. In addition, since the winning lottery value corresponding to watermelon and weak cherry is 25536, the winning probability of the additional lottery during AT when the watermelon and weak cherry are won is 25536/65536, which is a strong cherry (or bonus). Since the corresponding winning lottery value is 65536, the winning probability of the additional lottery during AT when winning a strong cherry (or bonus) is 100% (= 65536/65536).

<Table of the number of additional / returning games when the embodiment 2-1 / AT is won>
The AT winning addition / return game number table shown in FIG. 22 (g) is a table to be referred to when determining the “AT winning addition game number” or the “AT winning return game number”, and in this example, it is a table to be referred to. The number of games is stored corresponding to each of the plurality of types of winning combinations. Here, the "number of additional games at the time of winning the AT" is the number of AT games to be added (added) when the game state is the AT state, and the "number of games returning at the time of winning the AT" is the game state. It is the number of AT games in the AT state when shifting (returning) to the AT state.

In this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 wins the AT addition lottery in the AT state, the AT addition at the time of winning is added by referring to the item of "Addition during AT" in the AT winning addition / return game number table. Determine the number of games. For example, if the winning combination is chance replay, the number of additional games at the time of winning the AT is 10G, and if the winning combination is watermelon, the number of additional games at the time of winning the AT is 20G or 80G, and the winning combination is watermelon. In that case, the number of additional games at the time of AT winning is 20G or 80G, and when the winning combination is a strong cherry or a bonus, the number of additional games at the time of AT winning is 100G.

Further, when the condition for shifting (returning) the gaming state to the AT state is satisfied, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the item of "return after AT end" in the table of the number of additional / returning games at the time of winning the AT. , Determine the number of return games when AT is won. For example, if the winning combination is chance replay, the number of return games at the time of AT winning is 50G, if the winning combination is watermelon, the number of returning games at the time of AT winning is 50G, and if the winning combination is a weak cherry. The number of return games at the time of AT winning is 50G, and when the winning combination is a strong cherry or a bonus, the number of return games at the time of AT winning is 50G.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the effect according to the first embodiment of the second embodiment in chronological order, and FIG. 23 (a) shows an example of the effect of a pattern that does not return to AT. Shows an example of the effect of the pattern of returning to AT.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production (without AT return) / First production, Third production>
First, an example of producing a pattern that does not return to AT will be described with reference to FIG. 23A. In the states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (1), the gaming state of the slot machine is the first state (AT state in this example), and in the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used. , The first effect (AT effect) is executed corresponding to the first state (AT state).

In this example, as the first effect (AT effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state), a background image display G11 suggesting that AT is in progress and an AT digestion game number display G12 (book). In the example, 136G), the display G13 of the number of remaining games (74G in this example), and the display G14 (236GET in this example) of the number of acquired game media during AT are executed.

The first effect (AT effect in this example) according to the present invention may be an effect performed in response to the first state (AT state in this example), and the mode thereof is particularly limited. Not done. Therefore, for example, the effect may be executed by using a display means other than the effect image display device 157, or a sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 2) may be used. The effect by sound may be executed, or the effect by light may be executed by using an optical output means capable of outputting light (for example, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 2), and the movement or rotation may be performed. The effect by the movable body may be performed by using a possible movable body, or the effect may be performed by using one, a plurality, or all of these effect means. Further, the effect may be produced by the effect means controlled by a control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) other than the first sub control unit 400.

Further, in the states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (1), the effect lamp 421 (light output means) is used to execute the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state). doing. In this example, as the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state), the effect lamp (chance lamp) 421 with the characters "Chance" is lit.

In this embodiment, the effect lamp 421, which will be described later, may not light even in the advantageous section. Specifically, as will be described later, the effect lamp 421 is lit during the AT state and during the period (CZ or pullback zone) that is an advantageous section remaining after the end of the AT, and after the end of the AT. Once it becomes a non-advantageous section, the production lamp 421 does not light until the next AT is started. The advantageous section is a section in which the lottery related to AT can be executed, and the period in which the AT lottery can be executed even in the normal gaming state is included in the advantageous section. In addition, an AT rush lottery may be performed during the bonus, and in the AT state, an additional lottery for the number of AT games may occur, so that the lottery is included in the advantageous section.

The third effect (in this example, the lamp effect) according to the present invention may be an effect performed in response to the first state (AT state in this example), and the mode thereof is particularly limited. Not done. Therefore, for example, the effect may be executed by using an optical output means other than the effect lamp 421, or a sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 2) may be used. The effect by sound may be executed, or the effect by display may be executed by using a display means capable of displaying (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 2), or the movement or rotation may be performed. The effect by the movable body may be performed by using a possible movable body, or the effect may be performed by using one, a plurality, or all of these effect means. Further, the effect may be produced by the effect means controlled by a control unit (for example, the main control unit 300) other than the first sub control unit 400.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production (without AT return) / End of first production>
The following states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (2) are states in which the first state (AT state) has ended, and in the same state, the first effect (AT) corresponding to the first state (AT state). (Direction) has been completed.

In this example, the display G11 of the background image suggesting that the AT has ended, the display G14 of the number of acquired game media during the AT (485 GET in this example), and the AT end notification G15 (in this example) notifying the end of the AT. In this example, the character display of the end of ART) is executed respectively.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production (without AT return) / Second production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (3), the gaming state of the slot machine changes from the first state (AT state) to the second state (in this example, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state). , Re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), and in the same state, the second state (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) is used by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). )), The second production (normal production) is being executed.

In this example, the background suggesting that the second effect (normal effect) corresponding to the second state (replay combination low probability state (pullback zone)) is the replay combination low probability state (pullback zone). Image display G21 is being executed.

Further, in the states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (3), the effect lamp 421 (light output means) is used to correspond to the second state (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). (Lamp production) is being performed. In this example, as the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the second state (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), the effect lamp 421 with the characters of Change is lit.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production (without AT return) / AT return lottery in the second state>
The following states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (4) are states in which the AT return lottery is executed in the second state (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the AT return lottery table shown in FIG. 22A after the end of AT, and obtains a random number value (0 to 0 in this example) from a random number value generation circuit or the like. 63335) determines whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the winning lottery value associated with each winning combination, and determines whether the AT return lottery is won or lost (non-winning). Run.

In this example, since no prize was won in any of the winning combinations (because there was no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination on the winning line L1), the AT return lottery was missed (non-winning). Deciding.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production (without AT return) / End of third production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (5), the gaming state of the slot machine is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). It is a state in which the player has transitioned to the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)), and in this state, a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of a certain operating means (start lever 135) is performed. Taking the opportunity of (accepted), the second effect (normal effect) corresponding to the third state is executed, while the third effect (lamp effect) is completed by turning off the effect lamp 421. There is.

The end trigger of the third effect (lamp effect) is not limited to the acceptance of the operation of the start lever 135, and for example, the acceptance of any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (first stop operation-). It may be that any of the third stop operations was performed), that any of the bet buttons 130 to 132 was accepted, and that the winning determination was completed (for example, it was described with reference to FIG. 7). The winning determination process has been completed), etc.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production (without AT return) / AT return lottery in the third state>
The following states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (6) are states in which the AT return lottery is executed in the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)). As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the AT return lottery table during the non-advantageous section shown in FIG. 22D during the non-advantageous section (for example, the re-game combination low probability state (normal)). , Regardless of the random number value (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like, the process of determining the AT return lottery as non-winning is executed.

In this example, the strong cherry is won (although the combination of "cherry-ANY-cherry" symbols is available on the winning line L1), but the AT return is based on the AT return lottery table during the non-advantageous section. It is judged that the lottery is out of the lottery (non-winning). In this example, in the AT return lottery in the third state, the non-winning is determined with a 100% probability, so that the non-winning may be determined without performing the lottery itself. Further, in this example, in the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to perform a small role notification (winning effect) KK to notify that the strong cherry has won a prize.

The following states shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (7) are states in which the precursor effect is not performed in the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)). As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 acquires a random number value from a random number value generation circuit or the like when the condition for shifting from the re-game low probability state (normal) to the re-game high probability state (AT state) is satisfied. (In this example, 0 to 127) is determined to be the lottery value associated with which precursor game number, and the process of determining the number of games for which the AT precursor effect is performed is executed. Since the condition for shifting to the re-game high probability state (AT state) is not satisfied, the precursor effect is not performed while continuing the third state (re-game combination low probability state (normal)).

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production (with AT return) / First production, Third production>
Next, an example of producing a pattern for returning to AT will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (b). It should be noted that the states shown in FIGS. 23 (b) (1) to (b) (3) are shown in FIGS. Since it is in the same state as in FIG. 23 (b), the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be given from the state shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 23 (4).

<Embodiment 2-1 / Direction (with AT return) / AT return lottery in the second state>
The states shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 23 (4) are states in which the AT return lottery is executed in the second state (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the AT return lottery table shown in FIG. 22A after the end of AT, and obtains a random number value (0 to 0 in this example) from a random number value generation circuit or the like. 63335) determines whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the winning lottery value associated with each winning combination, and determines whether the AT return lottery is won or lost (non-winning). Run.

In this example, if a strong cherry is won (the combination of "cherry-ANY-cherry" symbols is aligned on the winning line L1) and the strong cherry is won, the probability of winning the AT return lottery is 100%. Therefore, it is judged that the AT return lottery has been won.

In addition, in the same state, since the AT return lottery was won, the production image display device 157 (display means) was used to perform an AT notification AK suggesting a transition to the AT state, and a prize was won. Therefore, using the effect image display device 157 (display means), a small role notification (winning effect) KK is performed to notify that the strong cherry has won a prize.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production (with AT return) / First production, Third production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 23 (5), the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the second state (in this example, the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) to the first state (AT state). In this state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to execute the first effect (AT effect) in response to the first state (AT state). ing.

In this example, as the first effect (AT effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state), a background image display G11 suggesting that AT is in progress and an AT digestion game number display G12 (book). In the example, 210G), the display G13 of the number of remaining games (50G in this example), and the display G14 (485GET in this example) of the number of acquired game media during AT are executed.

It should be noted that the first effect (for example, the AT state) corresponding to the first state (AT state) when the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)) is changed to the first state (AT state). The production mode of the AT production shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 23 (1) and (b) and (1), and the second state (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) to the first state (AT). The effect mode of the first effect (for example, the AT effect shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and (5)) corresponding to the first state (AT state) when shifting to the state) may be the same. However, some or all may be different.

Further, in the same state, the effect lamp 421 (light output means) is used to execute the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state). In this example, as the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state), the effect lamp 421 with the characters of Change is lit.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Invention 2-1 to 2-4 of the present application>
FIG. 24 is a time chart of the effect according to the first embodiment of the second embodiment. As described with reference to FIG. 23, in the production according to this example, the gaming state of the slot machine is the second state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state ST1 (AT state) to the first state ST1. When the state ST2 (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) is entered (at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T12 in FIG. 24), the second state ST2 (display means) is used by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). The second effect DR2 (normal effect) is executed (started) in response to the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone).

Therefore, according to the effect according to this example, the effect is changed stepwise (first effect DR1 + third effect DR3 → second effect DR2 + third effect DR3) to achieve the first state (1st effect DR1 + 3rd effect DR3). While alleviating the disappointment that the AT state has ended, the expectation of returning to the first state (AT state) can be left, and the player's willingness to play may be maintained.

Further, in the production according to this example, the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the first state ST1 (AT state) to the second state ST2 (replaying combination low probability) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state ST1. When the state (pull-back zone) is entered (at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T12 in FIG. 24), the second state ST2 (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back)) is used by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). In addition to executing (starting) the second effect DR2 (normal effect) in response to (zone)), the game state of the slot machine is the second state ST2 (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). ) To the third state ST3 (replaying combination low probability state (normal)), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state ST2 (at the timing indicated by reference numeral T23 in FIG. 24), for directing. By turning off the lamp 421, the third effect DR3 (lamp effect) is completed.

Therefore, according to the effect according to this example, the effect is gradually degraded by using a plurality of effect means (for example, display means, sound output means) (first effect DR1 + third effect DR3 → second). The effect DR2 + the third effect DR3 → the second effect DR2) may alleviate the disappointment that the gaming state has shifted to a disadvantageous state. In addition, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the change in the gaming state.

Further, in the effect according to this example, the game in which the first state ST1 (AT state) is started and the game in which the third effect DR3 (lamp effect) is started are the same game, so that the first effect In some cases, the start timing of the (AT effect) and the start timing of the third effect (lamp effect) can be made the same, and a game table having a characteristic in the effect means can be provided.

Further, in the effect according to this example, the third effect DR3 (lamp effect) and the second state ST2 (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) performed in response to the first state ST1 (AT state). ))), Since the third effect DR3 (lamp effect) is executed by the same effect means (effect lamp 421), it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the effect means.

Further, in the production related to this example, in the first state ST1 (AT state), the privilege that can be given when the internal winning result determining means determines the first winning combination (weak cherry) is the first privilege. (30G or 70G corresponding to the addition during AT in the AT winning addition / return game number table shown in FIG. 22 (g)), and in the second state ST2 (replaying combination low probability state (pullback zone)). When the internal winning result determining means determines the first winning combination (weak cherry), the privilege that can be given is the second privilege (AT in the AT winning addition / return game number table shown in FIG. 22 (g)). It is 50G) corresponding to the return after the end, and since the first privilege and the second privilege are different privilege, different expectations are given to the player in each of the first state and the second state. May be able to give.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbols shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels. (For example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), a stop operation means capable of executing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and An internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A) that determines the result of the internal winning based on the lottery value, the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the above. A stop result deriving means (for example, the winning determination process shown in FIG. 7A) for deriving the stop results of the plurality of reels based on the operation result of the stop operation means, and an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. (For example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 23, the effect lamp 421 shown in FIG. 23, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2, various lamps 339, 420 shown in FIG. 2, and a movable body). In the stand, one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, AT effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect (for example, AT effect). , Normal effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, a lamp effect), from the first state (for example, AT state) to the first state. There is a case where the player shifts to a second state (for example, a low probability state of the reel player (pull-back zone)) which is more disadvantageous to the player (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"), and from the second state. There is a case where the player shifts to a third state (for example, a re-player low probability state (normal)) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state, and the first effect is executed in the first state. The second effect is executed in the second state shifted from the first state and the third state shifted from the second state, and the first effect is executed. The third effect is executed in one state, the third effect is executed in the second state in which the second effect is executed, and the second effect is executed. The game console is characterized in that the third effect is not executed in the three states (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the present invention 2-1").

According to the game table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application, it is possible to provide a game table having a feature in the production means. Specifically, by changing the production step by step, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment that the first state has ended, while leaving the expectation of returning to the first state, and sustaining the player's willingness to play. You may be able to do it.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbols shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels (for example, FIG. Based on the reels 110 to 112) shown in 1 and the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a lottery value. The internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A), the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the stop operating means. A stop result deriving means for deriving the stop results of the plurality of reels based on the result of the operation (for example, the winning determination process shown in FIG. 7A) and an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, FIG. A game table including an effect image display device 157 shown in 23, an effect lamp 421 shown in FIG. 23, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2, various lamps 339, 420 shown in FIG. 2, and a movable body). , One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, AT effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect (for example, normal effect). One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, a lamp effect), and the third effect is an effect executed during the execution of the first effect. Yes, there is a case of shifting from the first state (for example, AT state) to the second state (for example, the re-player low probability state (pull-back zone)) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state (hereinafter, There is a "first case"), and the state shifts from the second state to a third state (for example, a re-player low probability state (normal)) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state. In some cases, the first effect is executed in the first state, and the second state transitioned from the first state and the second state shifted from the second state. The third effect is executed in the first state in which the first effect is executed, and the third effect is executed in the second state in which the second effect is executed. In the third state in which the second effect is executed, the third effect is not executed, and the game in which the AT state is started and the third effect are started. The game is a game table characterized by being the same game (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the present invention 2-2").

According to the game table according to the invention 2-2 of the present application, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means. Specifically, by changing the production step by step, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment that the first state has ended, while leaving the expectation of returning to the first state, and sustaining the player's willingness to play. You may be able to do it.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbols shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels (for example, FIG. Based on the reels 110 to 112) shown in 1 and the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a lottery value. The internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A), the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the stop operating means. A stop result deriving means for deriving the stop results of the plurality of reels based on the result of the operation (for example, the winning determination process shown in FIG. 7A) and an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, FIG. A game table including an effect image display device 157 shown in 23, an effect lamp 421 shown in FIG. 23, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2, various lamps 339, 420 shown in FIG. 2, and a movable body). , One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, AT effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect (for example, normal effect). One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, a lamp effect), and the third effect is an effect executed during the execution of the first effect. Yes, there is a case of shifting from the first state (for example, AT state) to the second state (for example, the re-player low probability state (pull-back zone)) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state (hereinafter, There is a "first case"), and the state shifts from the second state to a third state (for example, a re-player low probability state (normal)) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state. In some cases, the first effect is executed in the first state, and the second state transitioned from the first state and the second state shifted from the second state. The third effect is executed in the first state in which the first effect is executed, and the third effect is executed in the second state in which the second effect is executed. The third effect is performed in the third state in which the second effect is executed, and the third effect is not executed in the third state, and the third effect is performed in the first state and the second effect. The third effect performed in the above state is executed by the same effect means (hereinafter, "the present invention 2-". It may be called "3". ).

According to the game table according to the invention 2-3 of the present application, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means. Specifically, by changing the production step by step, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment that the first state has ended, while leaving the expectation of returning to the first state, and sustaining the player's willingness to play. You may be able to do it.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels (for example, FIG. Based on the reels 110 to 112) shown in 1 and the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a lottery value. The internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A), the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the stop operating means. A stop result deriving means for deriving the stop results of the plurality of reels based on the result of the operation (for example, the winning determination process shown in FIG. 7A) and an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, FIG. A game table including an effect image display device 157 shown in 23, an effect lamp 421 shown in FIG. 23, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2, various lamps 339, 420 shown in FIG. 2, and a movable body). , One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, AT effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect (for example, normal effect). One of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, a lamp effect), and the third effect is an effect executed during the execution of the first effect. Yes, there is a case of shifting from the first state (for example, AT state) to the second state (for example, the re-player low probability state (pull-back zone)) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state (hereinafter, There is a "first case"), and the state shifts from the second state to a third state (for example, a re-player low probability state (normal)) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state. In some cases, the first effect is executed in the first state, and the second state transitioned from the first state and the second state shifted from the second state. The third effect is executed in the first state in which the first effect is executed, and the third effect is executed in the second state in which the second effect is executed. The third effect is not executed in the third state in which the second effect is executed, and in the first state, the internal winning result determining means is the first winning. The privilege that can be given when the role (for example, weak cherry) is decided is the first privilege (for example, when the AT is won as shown in FIG. 22 (g)). 30G or 70G corresponding to the addition during AT of the addition / return game number table), and the privilege that can be given when the internal winning result determining means determines the first winning combination in the second state is , The second privilege (for example, 50 G corresponding to the return after the end of AT in the table of the number of additional / return games at the time of winning the AT shown in FIG. 22 (g)), and the first privilege and the second privilege are A game table characterized by having different benefits (hereinafter, may be referred to as "invention 2-4 of the present application". ).

The "different benefits" according to the invention 2-4 of the present application include cases where the number of additional games is different, cases where the table for granting benefits is different but some common benefits are included, and cases where the benefits are the same. However, there are cases where the effect mode for giving is different. In addition, the privilege is not limited to the number of games added to the AT. For example, the winning probability of the winning combination is high, the special effect is executed, or the execution probability of the special effect is high, and the item is given. And so on.

According to the game table according to the invention 2-4 of the present application, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means. Specifically, by changing the production step by step, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment that the first state has ended, while leaving the expectation of returning to the first state, and sustaining the player's willingness to play. You may be able to do it.

The configuration of the gaming table according to the inventions 2-1 to 2-4 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the second embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first gaming state", the "second gaming state", and the "third gaming state" according to the inventions 2-1 to 2-4 of the present application have a relationship of advantage and disadvantage to the player. Various combinations are possible as long as they are secured. For example, in the above embodiment, the combination of AT state> pullback zone> normal (advantageous section, AT lottery probability (low) is disclosed, but AT state (addition probability is high), AT state (addition probability is in progress), AT state (in addition probability). Addition probability low), pullback zone (pullback probability high), pullback zone (pullback probability low), normal (AT lottery probability high), normal (AT lottery probability medium), normal (AT lottery probability low), AT no lottery (non-lottery) Any three states among a plurality of states such as (advantageous section) can be applied. Also, two or more states among the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state. However, it may be in the AT state, or all the states may be in the normal state.

Further, the "first effect", the "second effect", and the "third effect" according to the inventions 2-1 to 2-4 of the present application are effects that are executed in a certain state. Not only the production that is continuously executed for a certain period of time, but also the one that is executed for a part of a certain state, and the one that is performed intermittently for each game of a certain state. Also includes. For example, it is a production that occurs only when a replay (cherry, a special replay or other small role, a loss, or a combination of one or more of all small roles including a loss) is won. It may be an effect that occurs only during a certain period such as during a lever operation-reel rotation, stop operation, winning judgment, etc., or a combination of these, or even if there is a game in which the effect is not executed. good. Further, when the effect is generated intermittently, the player can be made to guess or expect a relatively advantageous state. On the other hand, when the effect is continuously executed, the effect is that the state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the combination of the effect and the effect being executed.

Further, the first state may be continued over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as "first game number") (for example, only in the case of a plurality of games, or in the case of one game). There may be a state in which the number of first games and the number of second games may be composed of one or a plurality of games), and the first effect is It is an effect executed with a probability equal to or higher than the probability that the number of the first games is used as the probability denominator (hereinafter, referred to as "first probability"), and the third effect is equal to or higher than the first probability. It may be an effect executed with a second probability.

Further, the second state may be continued over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as "second game number") (for example, only in the case of a plurality of games, or in the case of one game). There may be a state in which the number of the first game and the number of the second games may be composed of one or a plurality of games), and the second effect is It is an effect executed with a probability equal to or higher than the probability that the number of the second game is set as the probability denominator (hereinafter, referred to as "third probability"), and the third effect is equal to or higher than the third probability. It may be an effect executed with a fourth probability.

For example, when the number of the first game and the number of the second games are 10 games, the first effect may have a probability of 1/10 or more, and the second effect may have a probability of 1/10 or more. It is less likely that the first effect will never be executed in the first game, and less likely that the second effect will never be executed in the second game. The lottery probability referred to here refers to a fixed lottery probability for each game, but may be in a different lottery form. For example, the lottery may be performed only for games that satisfy specific conditions (such as when a lottery by a small winning combination is won or an even numbered game regardless of a winning combination) among the above 10G. In the first state, it may be a lottery form in which the possibility that the first effect and the third effect are executed one or more times in 10G is sufficient, and in the second state, the lottery form may be used. It may be a lottery form in which the possibility that the second effect and the third effect are executed once or more in 10G is high.

Further, in a certain game, the first effect (the second effect in the second state) and the third effect may be performed in duplicate in the first state. It may be possible to infer the state from the effects and combinations of effects that appear.

Further, in the lottery form, in the first state, the first effect and the third effect may be drawn independently, or only the first effect, only the third effect, or both effects. It may be in the form of drawing the appearance. Further, in the lottery form, in the second state, the second effect and the third effect may be drawn independently, or only the second effect, only the third effect, or both effects. It may be in the form of drawing the appearance. If it is a lottery format in which both effects are produced, it can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, both the first effect and the third effect may be performed in an overlapping manner, or each may be performed independently. Further, both the second effect and the third effect may be performed in an overlapping manner, or each may be performed independently.

Further, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect may be executed for at least a part of the period of the game to be executed. For example, it may be executed for a predetermined time triggered by a lever operation, reel rotation, stop operation, winning determination, etc., or may be executed over one or a plurality of periods between the plurality of triggers. The player can confirm the effect by concentrating on a predetermined time when the effect is executed.

Further, the number of the first game and the number of the second games may be different numbers, the number of games may be the same, and the number of the first games and the number of the second games may be one or more. When composed of the number of games, all the numbers of games may be different from each other, or at least a part of them may be the same number of games.

In addition, the first effect is executed over a period corresponding to the first state, and the period corresponding to the second state shifted from the first state is shifted from the second state. The second effect is executed for a period corresponding to the third state, and the third effect is executed for a period corresponding to the first state in which the first effect is executed. , The third effect may be executed for a period corresponding to the second state in which the second effect is executed.

The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect may be executed in a period of 1G. For example, one of the effects may be started by lever operation, reel rotation, stop operation, winning determination, etc., and all the effects may be completed within the same 1G. The player can confirm the effect by concentrating on the 1G in which the effect is executed.

Further, the effect means includes a first effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 23) and a second effect means (for example, the effect lamp 421 shown in FIG. 23). The first effect means may be a means capable of executing the first effect and the second effect, and the second effect means may be a means capable of executing the third effect.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player by gradually declining the production by using a plurality of production means. The first effect means and the second effect means may be the same type of effect means (for example, both are display means), or different types of effect means (for example, one is a display means and the other is a display means). Sound output means) may be used.

Further, when shifting from the first state to the third state (hereinafter, referred to as "second case". For example, when the specified number of games of AT has been exhausted and there is no return to the AT state (hereinafter, When the transition condition (H1) shown in FIG. 20 is satisfied), or when the specified number of games of AT is exhausted and the limiter of the counter is activated (when the transition condition (H2) shown in FIG. 20 is satisfied). ), And rather than the period of the first state that was executed immediately before the transition to the third state in the second case, immediately before the transition to the second state in the first case. The period of the first state being performed may be shorter (or more likely to be shorter).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the gaming state after the first state to the player depending on the length of the period of the first state, and it may be possible to raise the expectation of the player.

Further, in the first case, the transition to the second state is performed rather than the number of game media acquired in the first state, which was executed immediately before the transition to the third state in the second case. The number of game media acquired in the first state, which was executed immediately before the game, may be smaller (or likely to be smaller).

With such a configuration, the number of game media acquired in the first state can suggest the game state after the first state to the player, and the expectation of the player can be increased. There is.

Further, in the second state, the AT state is started in response to the determination of the (for example) first winning combination (for example, weak cherry, watermelon) by the internal winning result determining means (hereinafter). , "Third case"), and in the third state, the first state is not started when the internal winning result determining means determines the first winning combination. You may.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually hold the expectation of pulling back only when the first state ends early. In the second state, even if the internal winning result determining means always starts the first state in response to the determination of the first winning combination (for example, strong cherry). good.

Further, in the normal state, when the first state is started in response to the determination of the first winning combination by the internal winning result determining means (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth case"). There is, in the third case, the period from the determination of the first winning combination by the internal winning result determining means to the start of the first state is the third period, and the third period. In the fourth case, the period from the determination of the first winning combination by the internal winning result determining means to the start of the first state is the fourth period, which is the third period. The length may be shorter than the length of the fourth period.

With such a configuration, the player's mood may be raised at once when the player returns to the first state.

Further, the starting operation means (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 1) capable of executing the operation for starting the rotation of the plurality of reels is provided, and the first state is started in the third case. The notification of this is performed from the timing triggered by the operation of the start operating means of the game in which the first winning combination is determined to the timing triggered by the operation of the start operating means of the next game. There may be.

With such a configuration, the start of the first state can be notified at the same timing as the start of the game, and the mood of the player may be further excited.

Further, instead of "the first effect and the third effect are executed in response to the first state", "the first effect is executed in response to the first state". Instead of "the third effect is finished" and "in the second case, the second effect is executed corresponding to the third state and the third effect is finished". "In the second case, the second effect and the third effect are executed in response to the third state" may be used.

Further, the first state may be "CZ (chance zone) = state with lottery for both rush lottery and chance combination lottery" described later, and in this case, the second state is the first state. "There is only a chance role lottery" that is more disadvantageous to the player than the state, and the third state is a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state (a state without lottery for both the rush lottery and the chance role lottery) ) May be.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first effect is "AT effect", the second effect is "normal effect", and the third effect is "lamp effect". For example, in the third state. Instead of the second effect performed, a fourth effect different from the second effect (performed in a state other than the third state) may be executed.

Further, the second effect may be configured to include a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value of the slot machine. With such a configuration, in the second state, it may be possible to proceed with the game while expecting both a high setting and an AT return.

<Embodiment 2-2>
Next, a specific example of the effect according to the second embodiment of the second embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of various lottery tables for executing the effect according to the second embodiment of the second embodiment. In this example, an example in which the same lottery table is used in settings 1 to 6 will be described, but at least one lottery table having different winning probabilities may be prepared for each set value.

<Embodiment 2-2 / CZ rush lottery table at the end of AT>
The AT-end CZ rush lottery table shown in FIG. 25 (a) is a lottery table to be referred to when performing the "AT-end CZ rush lottery". The lottery data is stored corresponding to each of the above. Here, the "CZ rush lottery at the end of AT" is a lottery that determines whether or not to shift the game state from the AT state to the CZ (chance zone) of the re-game low probability state (pull-back zone) (CZ rush). That is.

As described above, the CZ (chance zone) is a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state (AT state), and is a pullback of the second state (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). It is a state more advantageous to the player than the 1G and the third state (re-game combination low probability state (normal)).

In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 has a random number value (0 to 127 in this example) acquired from a random number value generation circuit or the like at the time of the third stop operation of the final game in the first state (AT state). , It is determined whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the out-of-lot lottery value associated with the main sign winning or the Gase sign winning, and the winning or losing (non-winning) of the main sign or the Gase sign is determined. Execute the process to determine. The timing of the CZ rush lottery at the end of AT is not limited to the third stop operation of the final game in the first state (AT state), for example, the start lever operation of the final game in the first state (AT state). It may be another timing such as time.

For example, since the lottery value of the winning corresponding to the precursory winning is 10, the winning probability of entering the CZ by the precursory winning is 10/128, and the lottery value of the winning corresponding to the precursory winning is 20. Therefore, the probability of winning the CZ rush by winning the sign of Gase is 20/128. In this example, the pullback 1G may be given even if the player does not win the sign or the sign of the game (when the limiter has not been reached).

<Embodiment 2-2 / Omen game number table at the time of winning this omen>
The table of the number of precursor games at the time of winning the precursor shown in FIG. 25 (b) is obtained when the present precursor is won in the CZ entry lottery at the end of AT using the CZ entry lottery table at the end of AT shown in FIG. 25 (a). This is a lottery table to be referred to when performing the “lottery for determining the number of precursor games”, and in this example, lottery data is stored corresponding to the number of precursor games of 13 to 16. Here, the "lottery for determining the number of present precursor games" is a lottery for determining the number of games for which the AT precursor effect is performed, which suggests that the gaming state shifts to the AT state during CZ.

In this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 wins the main sign winning in the CZ rush lottery at the end of AT, the random number value (0 to 127 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like is eventually It is determined whether the lottery value is associated with the number of precursor games of the above, and a process of determining the number of games (= the number of CZ games) for performing the AT precursor effect is executed. For example, since the lottery values for winning corresponding to the number of precursor games of 13 to 16 are all 32, the winning probability of each of the number of precursor games of 13 to 16 is 32/128.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Table of the number of precursor games at the time of winning the precursor>
The table of the number of precursor games at the time of winning the precursor of Gase shown in FIG. 25 (c) is obtained when the CZ entry lottery at the end of AT using the CZ entry lottery table at the end of AT shown in FIG. 25 (a) is won. It is a lottery table to be referred to when performing "lottery for determining the number of precursory games", and in this example, lottery data is stored corresponding to 16 precursory games. Here, the "lottery for determining the number of precursory games" is the number of games (= the number of CZ games) that falsely suggests that the game state shifts to the AT state during CZ. It is a lottery to decide.

In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is irrespective of the random number value (0 to 127 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like when the first sub-control unit 400 wins the Gase precursor winning in the CZ rush lottery at the end of AT. , Executes a process of determining the number of games for which the AT Gase precursor effect is performed to 16.

<Embodiment 2-2 / AT return lottery table>
The AT return lottery table shown in FIG. 25D is a lottery table to be referred to when performing the “AT return lottery”, and in this example, lottery data is stored corresponding to each of a plurality of types of winning combinations. There is. Here, the "AT return lottery" is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift (return) the gaming state to the AT state.

In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is a random number value acquired from a random number value generation circuit or the like during CZ after the end of the first state (AT state) and during pullback 1G (0 in this example). ~ 63335) is a process of determining whether the lottery value is a winning lottery value or a losing lottery value associated with each winning combination, and determining whether the AT return lottery is won or lost (non-winning). To execute. In the present embodiment, when a long number of games is selected in the lottery for determining the number of precursory games, the AT return lottery is performed in each game, so that the chance of returning to AT is increased.

The timing of the AT return lottery is not limited to during the CZ after the end of the first state (AT state) and during the pullback 1G, for example, during the CZ after the end of the first state (AT state). Only, or other timings such as only during pullback 1G after the end of the first state (AT state) may be used.

For example, since the lottery value corresponding to the normal replay and bell (or loss) is 0, the winning probability of the AT return lottery when winning the normal replay and bell (or loss) is 0% (=). Since it is 0/65536) and the winning lottery value corresponding to the chance replay is 5536, the winning probability of the AT return lottery when winning the chance replay is 5536/65536. Further, since the lottery value of the winning corresponding to the watermelon and the weak cherry is 15536, the winning probability of the AT return lottery when the watermelon and the weak cherry are won is 15536/65536, which corresponds to the strong cherry (or bonus). Since the lottery value of the winning lottery is 65536, the winning probability of the AT return lottery when winning a strong cherry (or bonus) is 100% (= 65536/65536).

In this example, the AT return lottery is performed using the same AT return lottery table during CZ after the end of the first state (AT state) and during pullback 1G. For example, CZ The lottery value may be different between the inside and the pullback 1G. In addition, the lottery value may be different between the CZ due to the winning of the sign and the CZ due to the winning of the sign.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Direction>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the effect according to the second embodiment of the second embodiment in chronological order, and FIG. 26A shows an example of an effect of a pattern that does not return to AT, and FIG. 26B shows an example of the effect that does not return to AT. Shows an production example of a pattern of returning from CZ to AT. Further, FIG. 27A shows an example of the effect of the pattern of returning from the pullback 1G to the AT.

<Embodiment 2-1 / Production (without AT return) / First production, Third production>
First, an example of producing a pattern that does not return to AT will be described with reference to FIG. 26A.

In the states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (1), the gaming state of the slot machine is the first state (AT state in this example), and in the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used. , The first effect (AT effect) is executed corresponding to the first state (AT state).

In this example, as the first effect (AT effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state), a background image display G11 suggesting that AT is in progress and an AT digestion game number display G12 (book). In the example, 136G), the display G13 of the number of remaining games (74G in this example), and the display G14 (236GET in this example) of the number of acquired game media during AT are executed.

The first effect (AT effect in this example) according to the present invention may be an effect performed in response to the first state (AT state in this example), and the mode thereof is particularly limited. The point that is not performed is the same as that of the above-described embodiment 2-1.

Further, in the states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (1), the effect lamp 421 (light output means) is used to execute the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state). doing. In this example, as the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state), the effect lamp 421 with the characters of Change is lit.

The third effect (in this example, the lamp effect) according to the present invention may be an effect performed in response to the first state (AT state in this example), and the mode thereof is particularly limited. The point that is not performed is the same as that of the above-described embodiment 2-1.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Production (without AT return) / End of first production>
The following states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (2) are states in which the first state (AT state) has ended, and in the same state, the first effect (AT) corresponding to the first state (AT state). (Direction) has been completed.

In this example, the display G11 of the background image suggesting that the AT has ended, the display G14 of the number of acquired game media during the AT (485 GET in this example), and the AT end notification G15 (in this example) notifying the end of the AT. In this example, the character display of the end of ART) is executed respectively.

Further, in the states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (2), the CZ rush lottery at the end of AT is executed with the end of the first state (AT state) as a trigger. As described above, in the first sub-control unit 400, the random number value (0 to 127 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like at the time of the third stop operation of the final game in the first state (AT state) is used. , It is determined whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the out-of-lot lottery value associated with the main sign winning or the Gase sign winning, and the winning or losing (non-winning) of the main sign or the Gase sign is determined. Execute the process to determine. In this example, it is determined that the player has won the Omen, and the player is transferred to the CZ (chance zone) (enters the CZ).

Further, as described above, the first sub-control unit 400 sets the random number value (0 to 127 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like when the first sub-control unit 400 wins the Gase precursor winning in the CZ rush lottery at the end of AT. Regardless of this, the process of determining the number of games for which the AT Gase precursor effect is to be performed is executed.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Production (without AT return) / Fourth production, Third production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (3), the gaming state of the slot machine changes from the first state (AT state) to the fourth state (in this example, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state). , CZ of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). The fourth effect (CZ effect) is executed corresponding to the CZ) of the pullback zone).

In this example, as the fourth effect (CZ effect) corresponding to the fourth state (CZ of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), it is the CZ of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone). The character display of "high probability" suggesting the above, and the effect of closing the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b to hide the effect image display device 157 are executed.

Further, in the states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (3), the effect lamp 421 (light output means) is used to correspond to the second state (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). (Lamp production) is being performed. In this example, as the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the second state (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), the effect lamp 421 with the characters of Change is lit.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Direction (without AT return) / AT return lottery in the fourth state>
The following states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (4) are states in which the AT return lottery is executed in the fourth state (CZ in the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). As described above, in the first sub-control unit 400, the random values (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like are displayed in the CZ after the end of the first state (AT state). It is determined whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the winning lottery value associated with the winning combination, and the process of determining the winning or losing (non-winning) of the AT return lottery is executed.

In this example, since no prize was won in any of the winning combinations (because there was no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination on the winning line L1), the AT return lottery was missed (non-winning). Deciding.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Production (without AT return) / Second production, Third production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (5), the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the fourth state (CZ of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) (AT state) to the fourth state. Is also in a state of shifting to a third state (in this example, pullback 1G of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) which is disadvantageous to the player, and in the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used. The second effect (normal effect) is executed in response to the fourth state (pullback 1G in the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)).

In this example, as the second effect (normal effect) corresponding to the third state (pull-back 1G in the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened to display the effect image. 157 is made to appear, and an effect of displaying a normal background image is being executed.

Further, in the states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (5), the effect lamp 421 (light output means) is used to correspond to the second state (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). (Lamp production) is being performed. In this example, as the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the second state (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), the effect lamp 421 with the characters of Change is lit.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Direction (without AT return) / AT return lottery in the second state>
The following states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (6) are states in which the AT return lottery is executed in the second state (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the random value (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like during the pullback 1G after the end of the first state (AT state). It is determined whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the winning lottery value associated with each winning combination, and the process of determining the winning or losing (non-winning) of the AT return lottery is executed.

In this example, since no prize was won in any of the winning combinations (because there was no symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination on the winning line L1), the AT return lottery was missed (non-winning). Deciding.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Production (without AT return) / End of third production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (7), the gaming state of the slot machine is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). It is a state in which the player has transitioned to the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)), and in this state, a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of a certain operating means (start lever 135) is performed. Taking the opportunity of (accepted), the second effect (normal effect) corresponding to the third state is executed, while the third effect (lamp effect) is completed by turning off the effect lamp 421. There is.

It should be noted that the end trigger of the third effect (lamp effect) is not limited to the acceptance of the operation of the start lever 135, as in the above embodiment 2-1.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Direction (without AT return) / AT return lottery in the third state>
The following states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (8) are states in which the AT return lottery is executed in the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)). As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the AT return lottery table during the non-advantageous section shown in FIG. 22D during the non-advantageous section (for example, the re-game combination low probability state (normal)). , Regardless of the random number value (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like, the process of determining the AT return lottery as (non-winning) is executed.

In this example, the strong cherry is won (although the combination of "cherry-ANY-cherry" symbols is available on the winning line L1), but the AT return is based on the AT return lottery table during the non-advantageous section. It is judged that the lottery is out of the lottery (non-winning). In this example, in the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to perform a small role notification (winning effect) KK to notify that the strong cherry has won a prize.

The following states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (9) are states in which the precursor effect is not performed in the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)). As described above, when the condition for shifting from the replay low probability state (normal) to the replay high probability state (AT state) is satisfied, the first sub-control unit 400 shows the normal AT shown in FIG. 22 (b). Using the precursor game number table, it is determined which precursor game number the random number value (0 to 127 in this example) obtained from the random number value generation circuit or the like is the lottery value associated with the precursor game number, and the AT precursor is AT precursor. The process of determining the number of games to be produced is executed, but in this example, since the condition for shifting to the replay high probability state (AT state) is not satisfied, the third state (replay combination low probability state) is executed. (Normal)) is being continued, but no precursory production is being performed.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Production (AT return from CZ) / First production, Third production>
Next, an example of producing a pattern of returning from CZ to AT will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (b). In order to avoid duplicate explanations, the illustrations and explanations corresponding to FIGS. 26 (a) (1) to (a) and (2) are omitted, and the explanations are given from the states shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (3). do.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Production (AT return from CZ) / Fourth production, Third production>
Similar to the states shown in FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (3), the states shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (3) are such that the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the first state (AT state) to the first state. Is also in a state of transition to a fourth state (in this example, CZ of the low probability state (pull-back zone) of the replaying combination) which is disadvantageous to the player, and in this state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used. Therefore, the fourth effect (CZ effect) is executed in response to the fourth state (CZ in the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)).

In this example, as the fourth effect (CZ effect) corresponding to the fourth state (CZ of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), it is the CZ of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone). The character display of "high probability" suggesting the above, and the effect of closing the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b to hide the effect image display device 157 are executed.

Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (3), the effect lamp 421 (light output means) is used to correspond to the second state (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). (Lamp production) is being performed. In this example, as the third effect (lamp effect) corresponding to the second state (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), the effect lamp 421 with the characters of Change is lit.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Direction (AT return from CZ) / AT return lottery in the fourth state>
The following states shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (4) are states in which the AT return lottery is executed in the fourth state (CZ in the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). As described above, in the first sub-control unit 400, the random values (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like are displayed in the CZ after the end of the first state (AT state). It is determined whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the winning lottery value associated with the winning combination, and the process of determining the winning or losing (non-winning) of the AT return lottery is executed.

In this example, if a strong cherry is won (the combination of "cherry-ANY-cherry" symbols is aligned on the winning line L1) and the strong cherry is won, the probability of winning the AT return lottery is 100%. Therefore, it is judged that the AT return lottery has been won.

Further, in the same state, since the AT return lottery was won, the AT notification AK (in this example, the image of the character and the symbol) suggesting the transition to the AT state is performed by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). (Display), but not a small role announcement (winning production) to notify that a strong cherry has won a prize.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Production (AT return from CZ) / Second production, Third production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and 26 (5), the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the second state (in this example, the CZ of the low probability state of the re-game combination (pull-back zone)) to the first state (AT). In this state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to perform the first effect (AT effect) in response to the first state (AT state). Running.

In this example, as the first effect (AT effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state), a background image display G11 suggesting that AT is in progress and an AT digestion game number display G12 (book). In the example, 210G), the display G13 of the number of remaining games (50G in this example), and the display G14 (485GET in this example) of the number of acquired game media during AT are executed.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Production (AT return from pullback 1G) / First production, third production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 27 (a), an production example of a pattern of returning from pullback 1G to AT will be described. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, the explanations of FIGS. 27 (a) (1) to 27 (a) (5) corresponding to FIGS. 26 (a) (1) to (a) (5) are shown. The description will be omitted and will be described from the state shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (6).

<Embodiment 2-2 / Direction (AT return from pullback 1G) / AT return lottery in the second state>
The following states shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (6) are states in which the AT return lottery is executed in the second state (pull-back 1G in the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 receives the random value (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like during the pullback 1G after the end of the first state (AT state). It is determined whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the winning lottery value associated with each winning combination, and the process of determining the winning or losing (non-winning) of the AT return lottery is executed.

In this example, if a strong cherry is won (the combination of "cherry-ANY-cherry" symbols is aligned on the winning line L1) and the strong cherry is won, the probability of winning the AT return lottery is 100%. Therefore, it is judged that the AT return lottery has been won.

Further, in the same state, since the AT return lottery was won, the AT notification AK (in this example, the image of the character and the symbol) suggesting the transition to the AT state is performed by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). (Display of Displaying the character image of the princess).

<Embodiment 2-2 / Production (AT return from pullback 1G) / Second production, third production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 27 (7), the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the second state (in this example, the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) to the first state (AT state). In this state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to execute the first effect (AT effect) in response to the first state (AT state). ing.

In this example, as the first effect (AT effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state), a background image display G11 suggesting that AT is in progress and an AT digestion game number display G12 (book). In the example, 210G), the display G13 of the number of remaining games (50G in this example), and the display G14 (485GET in this example) of the number of acquired game media during AT are executed.

<Embodiment 2-2 / Invention 2-5-2-6>
FIG. 28 is a time chart of the effect according to the second embodiment of the second embodiment. As described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 27, in the production according to this example, the gaming state of the slot machine is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state ST1 (AT state) to the first state ST1. When the state shifts to the second state ST2 (replaying combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) (at the timing indicated by reference numeral T12 in FIG. 28), the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to perform the second state. The fourth effect DR4 (CZ effect) corresponding to the state ST2 (CZ of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) and the second state ST2 (pull-back 1G of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) ), The second effect DR2 (normal effect) is executed (started).

Therefore, according to the effect according to this example, the effect is returned to the first state (AT state) while alleviating the disappointment that the first state (AT state) has ended by changing the effect step by step. In some cases, it is possible to leave expectations for the game and maintain the player's willingness to play.

Further, in the production according to this example, the period of the second state may change. For this reason, the first state (AT state) is alleviated by changing the effect step by step and changing the period of the second state to alleviate the disappointment that the first state (AT state) has ended. It is possible to leave the expectation of returning to the game, and it may be possible to maintain the player's willingness to play.

Further, in the effect according to this example, the third effect performed in response to the first state and the third effect performed in response to the second state are executed by the same effect means. Therefore, while changing the effect step by step, the third effect performed in response to the first state and the third effect performed in response to the second state are executed by the same effect means. By doing so, it is possible to leave the expectation of returning to the first state (AT state) while alleviating the disappointment that the first state (AT state) has ended, and sustaining the player's willingness to play. You may be able to.

Further, in the production according to this example, the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the first state ST1 (AT state) to the second state ST2 (replaying combination low probability) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state ST1. When the state (pull-back zone) is entered (at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T12 in FIG. 28), the second state ST2 (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back)) is used by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). The fourth production DR4 (CZ production) corresponding to the CZ) of the zone) and the second production DR2 (the pullback 1G of the replay role low probability state (pullback zone)) corresponding to the second state ST2 (return zone) In addition to executing (starting) the normal effect), the gaming state of the slot machine changes from the second state ST2 (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) to the player more than the second state ST2. When the player shifts to the disadvantageous third state ST3 (replaying combination low probability state (normal)) (at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T23 in FIG. 28), the effect lamp 421 is turned off to perform the third effect DR3 ( Lamp production) is finished.

Therefore, according to the effect according to this example, the game state is shifted to a disadvantageous state by gradually declining the effect by using a plurality of effect means (for example, display means, sound output means). It may be possible to relieve discouragement. In addition, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the change in the gaming state.

Further, in the production according to this example, the second state ST2 (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) includes the fourth state ST4 (re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone) CZ). The fourth state ST4 (CZ of the low probability state (return zone) of the replaying combination) is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state ST1 (AT state), and the third state ST3 (low replaying combination). It is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the pullback 1G) of the probability state (pullback zone), and may shift from the first state ST1 to the fourth state ST4, and the fourth state corresponding to the fourth state ST4. The production DR4 (CZ production) and the third production DR3 (lamp production) are executed.

Therefore, according to the effect according to this example, the effect is changed stepwise to the first state (AT state) while alleviating the disappointment that the first state (AT state) has ended. It may be possible to leave the expectation of returning and sustain the player's willingness to play.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbols shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels. (For example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), a stop operation means capable of executing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and An internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A) that determines the result of the internal winning based on the lottery value, the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the above. A stop result deriving means (for example, the winning determination process shown in FIG. 7A) for deriving the stop results of the plurality of reels based on the operation result of the stop operation means, and an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. (For example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the effect lamp 421 shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2, the various lamps 339, 420 shown in FIG. 2, and the movable body). The game console is provided with, and one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, AT effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is The second effect (for example, a normal effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, a lamp effect), from the first state (for example, AT state). There is a case (hereinafter, referred to as "first case") in which the player shifts to a second state (for example, a low probability state of the re-player combination (pull-back zone)) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state. The second state may shift to a third state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state (for example, a re-player low probability state (normal)), and in the first state, the first state The second effect is executed in the second state shifted from the first state and the third state shifted from the second state, and the first effect is executed. The third effect is executed in the first state, the third effect is executed in the second state in which the second effect is executed, and the second effect is executed. A game table characterized in that the third effect is not executed in the third state and the period of the second state may change (hereinafter, "the present invention 2-5"). In some cases.)

According to the game table according to the invention 2-5 of the present application, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means. Specifically, by changing the production step by step and changing the period of the second state, the disappointment that the first state has ended is alleviated, and the expectation of returning to the first state remains. It may be possible to sustain the player's willingness to play.

Further, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels (for example, FIG. Based on the reels 110 to 112) shown in 1 and the stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a lottery value. The internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A), the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the stop operating means. A stop result deriving means for deriving the stop results of the plurality of reels based on the result of the operation (for example, the winning determination process shown in FIG. 7A) and an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, FIG. 26, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 27, the effect lamp 421 shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2, various lamps 339, 420 shown in FIG. 2, and a movable body). In the game console, one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, AT effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect. (For example, a normal effect), one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, a lamp effect), and the third effect is during execution of the first effect. From the first state (for example, AT state) to the second state (for example, the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state. There is a case of transition (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), and a third state (for example, a re-playing combination low probability state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state from the second state. Normally)), the first effect is executed in the first state, and the second state shifted from the first state and the third state shifted from the second state. The second effect is executed in the state of, the first effect is executed, the third effect is executed in the first state, and the second effect is executed. The third effect is executed in the state of, the third effect is not executed in the third state in which the second effect is executed, and the third effect is performed in the first state. A game table characterized in that the effect and the third effect performed in the second state are performed by the same effect means (hereinafter referred to as a game table). , "Invention 2-6 of the present application". ).

According to the game table according to the invention 2-6 of the present application, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means. Specifically, while changing the effect step by step, the third effect performed in response to the first state and the third effect performed in response to the second state are the same effect means. By executing in, it is possible to leave the expectation of returning to the first state while alleviating the disappointment that the first state has ended, and it may be possible to maintain the player's willingness to play. ..

The configuration of the gaming table according to the inventions 2-5 to 2-6 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the second embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first gaming state", the "second gaming state", and the "third gaming state" according to the inventions 2 to 5 to 2-6 of the present application have a relationship of advantage and disadvantage to the player. Various combinations are possible as long as they are secured. For example, in the above embodiment, the combination of AT state> pullback zone> normal (advantageous section, AT lottery probability (low) is disclosed, but AT state (addition probability is high), AT state (addition probability is in progress), AT state (in addition probability). Addition probability low), pullback zone (pullback probability high), pullback zone (pullback probability low), normal (AT lottery probability high), normal (AT lottery probability medium), normal (AT lottery probability low), AT no lottery (non-lottery) Any three states among a plurality of states such as (advantageous section) can be applied. Also, two or more states among the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state. However, it may be in the AT state, or all the states may be in the normal state.

Further, the "first effect", the "second effect", and the "third effect" according to the inventions 2-5 to 2-6 of the present application are effects that are executed in a certain state. Not only the production that is continuously executed for a certain period of time, but also the one that is executed for a part of a certain state, and the one that is performed intermittently for each game of a certain state. Also includes. For example, it is a production that occurs only when a replay (cherry, a special replay or other small role, a loss, or a combination of one or more of all small roles including a loss) is won. It may be an effect that occurs only during a certain period such as during a lever operation-reel rotation, stop operation, winning judgment, etc., or a combination of these, or even if there is a game in which the effect is not executed. good. Further, when the effect is generated intermittently, the player can be made to guess or expect a relatively advantageous state. On the other hand, when the effect is continuously executed, the effect is that the state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the combination of the effect and the effect being executed.

Further, the first state may be continued over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as "first game number") (for example, only in the case of a plurality of games, or in the case of one game). There may be a state in which the number of first games and the number of second games may be composed of one or a plurality of games), and the first effect is It is an effect executed with a probability equal to or higher than the probability that the number of the first games is used as the probability denominator (hereinafter, referred to as "first probability"), and the third effect is equal to or higher than the first probability. It may be an effect executed with a second probability.

Further, the second state may be continued over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as "second game number") (for example, only in the case of a plurality of games, or in the case of one game). There may be a state in which the number of the first game and the number of the second games may be composed of one or a plurality of games), and the second effect is It is an effect executed with a probability equal to or higher than the probability that the number of the second game is set as the probability denominator (hereinafter, referred to as "third probability"), and the third effect is equal to or higher than the third probability. It may be an effect executed with a fourth probability.

For example, when the number of the first game and the number of the second games are 10 games, the first effect may have a probability of 1/10 or more, and the second effect may have a probability of 1/10 or more. It is less likely that the first effect will never be executed in the first game, and less likely that the second effect will never be executed in the second game. The lottery probability referred to here refers to a fixed lottery probability for each game, but may be in a different lottery form. For example, the lottery may be performed only for games that satisfy specific conditions (such as when a lottery by a small winning combination is won or an even numbered game regardless of a winning combination) among the above 10G. In the first state, it may be a lottery form in which the possibility that the first effect and the third effect are executed one or more times in 10G is sufficient, and in the second state, the lottery form may be used. It may be a lottery form in which the possibility that the second effect and the third effect are executed once or more in 10G is high.

Further, in a certain game, the first effect (the second effect in the second state) and the third effect may be performed in duplicate in the first state. It may be possible to infer the state from the effects and combinations of effects that appear.

Further, in the lottery form, in the first state, the first effect and the third effect may be drawn independently, or only the first effect, only the third effect, or both effects. It may be in the form of drawing the appearance. Further, in the lottery form, in the second state, the second effect and the third effect may be drawn independently, or only the second effect, only the third effect, or both effects. It may be in the form of drawing the appearance. If it is a lottery format in which both effects are produced, it can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, both the first effect and the third effect may be performed in an overlapping manner, or each may be performed independently. Further, both the second effect and the third effect may be performed in an overlapping manner, or each may be performed independently.

Further, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect may be executed for at least a part of the period of the game to be executed. For example, it may be executed for a predetermined time triggered by a lever operation, reel rotation, stop operation, winning determination, etc., or may be executed over one or a plurality of periods between the plurality of triggers. The player can confirm the effect by concentrating on a predetermined time when the effect is executed.

Further, the number of the first game and the number of the second games may be different numbers, the number of games may be the same, and the number of the first games and the number of the second games may be one or more. When composed of the number of games, all the numbers of games may be different from each other, or at least a part of them may be the same number of games.

In addition, the first effect is executed over a period corresponding to the first state, and the period corresponding to the second state shifted from the first state is shifted from the second state. The second effect is executed for a period corresponding to the third state, and the third effect is executed for a period corresponding to the first state in which the first effect is executed. , The third effect may be executed for a period corresponding to the second state in which the second effect is executed.

The first effect, the second effect, and the third effect may be executed in a period of 1G. For example, one of the effects may be started by lever operation, reel rotation, stop operation, winning determination, etc., and all the effects may be completed within the same 1G. The player can confirm the effect by concentrating on the 1G in which the effect is executed.

Further, one of the plurality of types of effects is a fourth effect (for example, a CZ effect), and in the second state in the first case, the fourth effect and the third effect. May be performed. Further, the second effect and the fourth effect may be the same effect.

Further, the second state is a state including a fourth state, and the fourth state is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state and is more disadvantageous to the player than the third state. It is an advantageous state, and there is a case where the first state shifts to the fourth state, and in the fourth state shifted from the first state, the fourth effect and the third effect are executed. It may be what is done.

With such a configuration, it is possible to leave the expectation of returning to the first state while alleviating the disappointment that the first state has ended by changing the production step by step, and the player's game. May be able to sustain motivation.

Further, the effect means includes a first effect means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 23) and a second effect means (for example, the effect lamp 421 shown in FIG. 23). The first effect means is a means capable of executing the first effect, the second effect, and the fourth effect, and the second effect means is a means capable of executing the third effect. It may be.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player by gradually declining the production by using a plurality of production means. The first effect means and the second effect means may be the same type of effect means (for example, both are display means), or different types of effect means (for example, one is a display means and the other is a display means). Sound output means) may be used.

Further, when shifting from the first state to the third state (hereinafter, referred to as "second case". For example, when the specified number of games of AT has been exhausted and there is no return to the AT state (hereinafter, When the transition condition (H1) shown in FIG. 20 is satisfied), or when the specified number of games of AT is exhausted and the limiter of the counter is activated (when the transition condition (H2) shown in FIG. 20 is satisfied). ), And rather than the period of the first state that was executed immediately before the transition to the third state in the second case, immediately before the transition to the second state in the first case. The period of the first state being performed may be shorter (or more likely to be shorter).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the gaming state after the first state to the player depending on the length of the period of the first state, and it may be possible to raise the expectation of the player.

Further, in the first case, the transition to the second state is performed rather than the number of game media acquired in the first state, which was executed immediately before the transition to the third state in the second case. The number of game media acquired in the first state, which was executed immediately before the game, may be smaller (or likely to be smaller).

With such a configuration, the number of game media acquired in the first state can suggest the game state after the first state to the player, and the expectation of the player can be increased. There is.

Further, in the second state, the AT state is started in response to the determination of the (for example) first winning combination (for example, weak cherry, watermelon) by the internal winning result determining means (hereinafter). , "Third case"), and in the third state, the first state is not started when the internal winning result determining means determines the first winning combination. You may.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually hold the expectation of pulling back only when the first state ends early. In the second state, even if the internal winning result determining means always starts the first state in response to the determination of the first winning combination (for example, strong cherry). good.

Further, in the normal state, when the first state is started in response to the determination of the first winning combination by the internal winning result determining means (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth case"). There is, in the third case, the period from the determination of the first winning combination by the internal winning result determining means to the start of the first state is the third period, and the third period. In the fourth case, the period from the determination of the first winning combination by the internal winning result determining means to the start of the first state is the fourth period, which is the third period. The length may be shorter than the length of the fourth period.

With such a configuration, the player's mood may be raised at once when the player returns to the first state.

Further, the starting operation means (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 1) capable of executing the operation for starting the rotation of the plurality of reels is provided, and the first state is started in the third case. The notification of this is performed from the timing triggered by the operation of the start operating means of the game in which the first winning combination is determined to the timing triggered by the operation of the start operating means of the next game. There may be.

With such a configuration, the start of the first state can be notified at the same timing as the start of the game, and the mood of the player may be further excited.

Further, in the first state, the effect of notifying the operation order of the stop operation means may be executed, and in the second state, the effect of notifying the operation order of the stop operation means is not executed. There may be.

<Embodiment 2-3>
Next, a specific example of the effect according to the third embodiment of the second embodiment will be described in detail. 29 and 30 are diagrams showing an example of the effect according to the third embodiment of the second embodiment in chronological order, and FIG. 29 (a) shows an example of the effect of holding the effect during the second state. , FIG. 29B shows an example of an effect in which the process shifts to the third state during the execution of the effect of holding for the second state. Further, FIGS. 30 (a) to 30 (c) show a modified example of the third embodiment of the second embodiment.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Production (Intermittent production) / First production>
First, with reference to FIG. 29 (a), an example of the effect of holding for a while in the second state will be described. In the states shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (1), the gaming state of the slot machine is the first state (AT state in this example), and in the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used. , The first effect (AT effect) is executed corresponding to the first state (AT state).

In this example, as the first effect (AT effect) corresponding to the first state (AT state), a background image display G11 suggesting that AT is in progress and an AT digestion game number display G12 (book). In the example, 136G), the display G13 of the number of remaining games (74G in this example), and the display G14 (236GET in this example) of the number of acquired game media during AT are executed.

The first effect (AT effect in this example) according to the present invention may be an effect that can be performed in the first state (AT state in this example), and the mode thereof is not particularly limited. Is the same as in the above embodiments 2-1 and 2-2.

Further, in the states shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (1), the effect lamp 421 (light output means) is used to execute the lamp effect corresponding to the first state (AT state). In this example, as the lamp effect corresponding to the first state (AT state), the effect lamp 421 with the characters "Change" is lit.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Production (Intermittent production) / End of first production>
The following states shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (2) are states in which the first state (AT state) has ended, and in the same state, the first effect (AT) corresponding to the first state (AT state). (Direction) has been completed.

In this example, the display G11 of the background image suggesting that the AT has ended, the display G14 of the number of acquired game media during the AT (485 GET in this example), and the AT end notification G15 (in this example) notifying the end of the AT. In this example, the character display of the end of ART) is executed respectively.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Production (Intermittent production) / Second production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (3), the gaming state of the slot machine is the first state when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). This is a state in which the player has shifted from the (AT state) to the second state (in this example, the non-advantageous section of the low probability state (pull-back zone) of the replaying combination), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state. Then, using the effect image display device 157 (display means), the second effect (interval) is related to the transition to the second state (non-advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). The lamp effect is completed by turning off the effect lamp 421 while executing the effect.

Here, the non-advantageous section (non-advantageous state) is a section in which the first state (AT state), which is more favorable to the player than the second state in relation to winning a certain winning combination, is not started (AT state). The state), and the advantageous section (advantageous state) is the start of the first state (AT state) which is more favorable to the player than the second state in relation to winning a certain winning combination. It is a section (state) that may occur.

The advantageous section and the non-advantageous section are not limited to this example, and the section in which the number of games up to CZ (average number of games) is large may be the advantageous section, and the section in which the number of games is small may be the non-advantageous section. The advantageous section and the non-advantageous section may be distinguished by the difference between the AT winning probability in the CZ and the AT winning probability in the second CZ. May be a non-advantageous section

Further, the trigger for shifting to the second state is not limited to the acceptance of the third stop operation, for example, the acceptance of any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (the first stop operation to the third stop operation). Either has happened), or the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, or any of the bet buttons 130 to 132 has been accepted, and the winning judgment has been completed (the winning judgment has been completed). For example, the winning determination process described with reference to FIG. 7 has been completed), and the like.

In this example, the second state (non-advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) corresponds to the period shown in FIGS. 29 (a) (3) to 29 (a) (6). As the second effect (interval effect) to be performed, an effect consisting of an animation display in which the character of the palace chases the character of the grandfather is executed.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Production (Intermittent production) / Third production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (7), the gaming state of the slot machine is changed to the second state when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). Transition from (non-advantageous section of re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) to a third state (in this example, re-game combination low probability state (normal)) that is more advantageous to the player than the second state. In the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to shift to the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)), and the third effect ( Normal production) is being executed.

That is, in this example, by starting the third effect (normal effect), the player shifts to the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)) which is more advantageous to the player than the second state. It is suggested that the second state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the third state (the non-advantageous section of the low probability state (pull-back zone) of the re-gaming role) has ended).

The transition to the third state is not limited to the acceptance of the third stop operation, and for example, the acceptance of any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (the first stop operation to the third stop operation). Either has happened), or the operation of the start lever 135 has been accepted, or any of the bet buttons 130 to 132 has been accepted, and the winning judgment has been completed (the winning judgment has been completed). For example, the winning determination process described with reference to FIG. 7 has been completed), and the like.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Production (Transition to the third state by pause production) / Second production (disadvantage)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (b), an example of the effect of shifting to the third state during the execution of the effect of holding the second state for a while will be described. Since the first effect is the same as in FIGS. 29 (a) (1) to (a) and (2), the illustration and description thereof are omitted, and the states shown in FIGS. 29 (b) and (3) are omitted. I will explain from.

In the states shown in FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (3), the gaming state of the slot machine changes from the first state (AT state) to the second state (in this example, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state). It is a state of shifting to the non-advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone). While the second effect (interval effect) is executed in connection with the transition to the (non-advantageous section of the pullback zone), the lamp effect is ended by turning off the effect lamp 421.

In this example, the second state (non-advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) corresponds to the period shown in FIGS. 29 (b) (3) to (b) (4). As the second effect (interval effect) to be performed, an effect consisting of an animation display in which the character of the palace chases the character of the grandfather is executed.

Further, in this example, since the bell was won in the state shown in FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (4) (because the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" were aligned on the winning line L1), the following From the game, the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the second state (non-advantageous section of the low probability state of replaying combination (pull-back zone)) to the third state (this example) which is more advantageous to the player than the second state. Is preparing to shift to the advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone).

<Embodiment 2-3 / Production (Transition to the third state by pause production) / Second production (advantageous)>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (5), the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the second state (non-advantageous section of the low probability state of the re-game combination (pull-back zone)) to the second state. It is a state in which the player has shifted to a third state (in this example, an advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), which is advantageous to the player. For the period shown in 6), the second effect (interval effect) is continued by using the effect image display device 157 (display means).

Further, since the period shown in FIGS. 29 (b) (5) to (b) (6) is an advantageous section, the AT return lottery is executed. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the AT return lottery table shown in FIG. 25 (d), and the random number values (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from the random number value generation circuit or the like win each prize. It is determined whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the winning lottery value associated with the winning combination, and the process of determining the winning or losing (non-winning) of the AT return lottery is executed.

In this example, if a strong cherry is won (the combination of "cherry-ANY-cherry" symbols is aligned on the winning line L1) and the strong cherry is won, the probability of winning the AT return lottery is 100%. Therefore, it is judged that the AT return lottery has been won.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Production (Transition to the third state by pause production) / Third production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (7), the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the third state (advantageous section of the low probability state of replaying combination (pull-back zone)) to the third state (in this example, in this example). It is a state of shifting to the re-game combination low probability state (normal)), and in the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to move to the third state (re-game combination low probability state (normal)). A third production (normal production) is being performed in connection with the transition.

That is, in this example, by starting the third effect (normal effect), the player shifts to the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)) which is more advantageous to the player than the second state. It is suggested that the second state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the third state (the non-advantageous section of the low probability state (pull-back zone) of the re-gaming role) has ended).

<Embodiment 2-3 / Direction (Transition to the third state by holding time) / CZ effect>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (8), the CZ effect (precursor effect) is executed by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). In this example, as the CZ effect (precursor effect), a "high probability" character display suggesting that the CZ is used and an effect of closing the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b to hide the effect image display device 157 are executed. There is.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Direction (Transition to the third state by paused effect) / AT notification>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (9), since the AT return lottery was won in the second state, it is suggested that the production image display device 157 (display means) is used to shift to the AT state. AT notification AK is being performed.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Direction (AT notification in the second state)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30A, an example of production in the case of performing AT notification in the second state will be described. Since the first effect and a part of the second effect are the same as those in FIGS. 29 (a) (1) to (a) and (3), the illustration and description thereof are omitted, and FIG. 30 ( b) The state shown in (4) will be described first.

In the states shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (4), as the second effect (interval effect) corresponding to the second state (non-advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), The production consists of an animation display in which the character follows the grandfather's character.

Further, in this example, since the bell was won in the same state (because the symbol combinations of "bell-bell-bell" were prepared on the winning line L1), the game state of the slot machine was changed from the next game. , From the second state (non-advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) to the third state (in this example, the re-game combination low probability state (in this example), which is more advantageous to the player than the second state). We are preparing to move to the advantageous section) of the pullback zone).

Since the following states shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (5) are advantageous sections, the AT return lottery is being executed. Here, if a strong cherry is won (the combination of "cherry-ANY-cherry" symbols is aligned on the winning line L1) and the strong cherry is won, the probability of winning the AT return lottery is 100%. Therefore, it is judged that the AT return lottery has been won.

In the following states shown in FIGS. 30A and 30A, since the AT return lottery was won in the second state, it is suggested that the production image display device 157 (display means) is used to shift to the AT state. AT notification AK is being performed.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Direction (Transition to the third state at the 1G of the second state)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30B, an example of the effect of shifting to the third state in the first G of the second state will be described. 30 (b), (1), (2), (5), and (6) showing the first effect and the second effect are shown in FIGS. 29 (a), (1), (2), and (6). ) And (7), the description thereof will be omitted, and only the states shown in FIGS. 30 (b) (3) to (b) (4) will be described.

The states shown in FIGS. 30 (b) (3) to (b) and (4) are all 1G after the end of the first state (AT state) and show the same game. In the states shown in FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (3), the gaming state of the slot machine changes from the first state (AT state) to the third state (in this example, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state). It is a state of shifting to the re-game combination low probability state (advantageous section of the pullback zone)), and in the same state, the third state (re-game combination low probability state (replay combination low probability state) is used by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). The second effect (interval effect) is executed in connection with the transition to the advantageous section) of the pullback zone), and the effect lamp 421 is continuously lit.

In the following states shown in FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (4), the game state of the slot machine is changed from the third state (in this example, the advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) during the same game. It is a state of shifting to the second state (in this example, the non-advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), and in this state, the second state is performed by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). While continuing the production (interval production), the lamp production is completed by turning off the production lamp 421.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Direction (AT notification in the advantageous section of the second state)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 30 (c), an example of production in the case of performing AT notification in the advantageous section of the second state will be described.

The states shown in FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (5) are states in which the gaming state of the slot machine has shifted to the third state (in this example, the advantageous section of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)). The second effect (interval effect) is executed by using the effect image display device 157 (display means).

Moreover, since the same state is an advantageous section, the AT return lottery is being executed. In this example, if a strong cherry is won (the combination of "cherry-ANY-cherry" symbols is aligned on the winning line L1) and the strong cherry is won, the probability of winning the AT return lottery is 100%. Therefore, it is judged that the AT return lottery has been won. Then, since he won the AT return lottery, he uses the effect image display device 157 (display means) to perform AT notification AK (no sign) suggesting that the state shifts to the AT state. The AT precursor may or may not be present.

<Embodiment 2-3 / Invention 2-7>
FIG. 31 is a time chart of the effect according to the third embodiment of the second embodiment. As described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 30, in the production according to this example, the gaming state of the slot machine is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state ST1 (AT state) to the first state ST1. When the state shifts to the second state ST2 (non-AT state) (at the timing indicated by reference numeral T12 in FIG. 31), the second state ST2 (non-AT state) is used by using the effect image display device 157 (display means). In connection with the transition to, the second effect DR2 (interval effect) is executed (started), and the gaming state of the slot machine is changed from the second state ST2 (non-AT state) to the second state. When the state shifts to the third state ST3 (non-AT state) which is more advantageous to the player than ST2 (at the timing indicated by the reference numeral T23 in FIG. 31), the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to perform the third state. The third effect DR3 (normal effect) is executed (started) in connection with the transition to the state ST2 (non-AT state).

Therefore, according to the effect according to this example, the process shifts to the third state, which is more advantageous than the second state, after waiting for the end of the second effect. It is possible to play a game while letting it play.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbol shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels. (For example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), a stop operation means capable of executing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and An internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A) for determining the result of the internal winning based on the lottery value, the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the above. A stop result deriving means (for example, the winning determination process shown in FIG. 7A) for deriving the stop results of the plurality of reels based on the operation result of the stop operation means, and an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. (For example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the effect lamp 421 shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the speaker 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2, the various lamps 339, 420 shown in FIG. 2, and the movable body). The game console is provided with, and one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, AT effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is The second effect (for example, a pause effect), one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, a normal effect), and the effect means is the first state. It is a means capable of executing the first effect in (for example, AT state), and the effect means is a second state (for example, a replay combination low probability state (pull back)) shifted from the first state. It is a means capable of executing the second effect in a non-AT state such as a non-advantageous section of the zone), and the effect means is a third state (for example, a low replaying role) that has shifted from the second state. It is a means capable of executing the third effect in a non-AT state such as an advantageous section of a probability state (pull-back zone), and the second effect is executed during the period of the second state, and the second effect is executed. At the time when the third effect is started, it is the third state, the first state is a state more advantageous than the second state, and the third state is from the second state. Is also an advantageous state, and it is suggested that the third state is started by the end of the second effect and the start of the third effect. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "Invention 2-7 of the present application").

According to the game table according to the invention 2-7 of the present application, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means. Specifically, since it shifts to the third state, which is more advantageous than the second state, after waiting for the end of the second production, it is necessary to let the player play the game while expecting the transition to the advantageous state. May be possible.

The configuration of the gaming table according to the invention 2-7 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the second embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first gaming state", the "second gaming state", and the "third gaming state" according to the present invention 2-7 are guaranteed to have an advantageous and disadvantageous relationship with the player. If so, various combinations are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, the combination of AT state> pullback zone> normal (advantageous section, AT lottery probability (low) is disclosed, but AT state (addition probability is high), AT state (addition probability is in progress), AT state (in addition probability). Addition probability low), pullback zone (pullback probability high), pullback zone (pullback probability low), normal (AT lottery probability high), normal (AT lottery probability medium), normal (AT lottery probability low), AT no lottery (non-lottery) Any three states among a plurality of states such as (advantageous section) can be applied. Also, two or more states among the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state. However, it may be in the AT state, or all the states may be in the normal state.

Further, the "first effect", the "second effect", and the "third effect" according to the invention 2-7 of the present application are effects that are executed in a certain state, but in a certain state. Not only the production that is continuously performed for a certain period of time, but also the production that is performed for a part of a certain state, and the one that is performed intermittently for each game of a certain state are also included. For example, it is a production that occurs only when a replay (cherry, a special replay or other small role, a loss, or a combination of one or more of all small roles including a loss) is won. It may be an effect that occurs only during a certain period such as during a lever operation-reel rotation, stop operation, winning judgment, etc., or a combination of these, or even if there is a game in which the effect is not executed. good. Further, when the effect is generated intermittently, the player can be made to guess or expect a relatively advantageous state. On the other hand, when the effect is continuously executed, the effect is that the state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the combination of the effect and the effect being executed.

Further, the third state includes a first period (for example, an advantageous section of two games shown in FIGS. 29 (b) (5) to (b) (6)) and a second period (for example, FIG. 29 (b) (7) and subsequent advantageous periods) are included, and the first period is a period including the first game of the third state shifted from the second state, and the first period is included. The second period is a period after the end of the first period, and the third state in the first period is more advantageous to the player than the third state in the second period. It may be in such a state.

In the first period and the second period, for example, the first chance zone is the first period, and the second period from the end of the first period to the next chance zone is the first chance. It is possible to make a difference such that the zone is easier to enter the AT state than the second chance zone, and the privilege is large when entering the AT (difference in the advantage of the third state).

With such a configuration, the third state (first period) after the end of the first state is more advantageous than the second period thereafter, so that the motivation to continue the game is maintained after the end of the first state. be able to. In addition, it may be possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the second effect, which is actually performed during the disadvantageous second state, as the transition period to the third state.

Further, the internal winning result determining means is a means capable of determining the first winning combination (for example, weak cherry or watermelon), and the third state means that the first winning combination has been determined. In connection with this, the first state may be started, and the second state is a state in which the first state is not started even when the first winning combination is determined. The second state is described in a part of the period during which the second effect is executed (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”; for example, the period of the game shown in FIGS. 29 (b) and 29 (7)). In the third state, the first state is started in connection with the determination of the first winning combination in the third period, and the first effect is started. May be done.

With such a configuration, the period during which the second production is being performed (basically, the period waiting for the transition to the third state) is also the first by winning the first winning combination. Since the state of may be started, it may be possible to give expectations to the player.

Further, from the first state to the second during a period different from the third period (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth period"), which is a part of the period during which the second effect is executed. In some cases, the first state may be started and the first effect may be started in connection with the determination of the first winning combination in the fourth period. There may be.

With such a configuration, the first state is started by winning the first winning combination during the fourth period (basically, the period waiting for the transition to the third state). In some cases, it may be possible to give the player expectations.

Further, the third effect is a normal effect, and may return to the first state without executing the third effect after the first state is completed.

With such a configuration, the second effect basically corresponds to the disadvantageous state, but it may return to the first state without executing the third effect, so it is like a pullback zone. It becomes possible to show, and as a result, the second production may be made to look like a chance production.

Further, if the AT is not won during the period in which the second effect is being executed, the second effect may end after the specified number of games have been exhausted.

Further, the effect means is a means capable of executing an effect according to the determination result of the internal winning result determination unit, and the effect means has determined the first winning combination in the second state. It is a means capable of executing the winning combination effect (hereinafter, referred to as "first winning combination effect") according to the above-mentioned effect means, and the first winning combination is determined in the third state. It is a means that can execute the winning combination production according to the above (hereinafter referred to as "second winning combination production"), and the first winning combination production and the second winning combination production are different winning combination productions. There may be a case where the third state is started in the next game in which the first winning combination is determined in the second state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to discriminate between the second state and the third state, and it may be possible to increase the player's motivation to play.

It should be noted that the first winning combination production and the second winning combination production may be different productions, and one of them may be non-production (no production is performed). Further, the effect includes a precursor effect, the first winning combination effect has no precursor effect (or the effect time is short), and the second winning combination effect has a precursor effect (or the effect time is long). ), But it may be.

Further, the third state may be a state in which the counter (number of games, number of acquired games, etc.) ends when the threshold value is reached.

Further, the second effect can be executed in a state other than after the end of the first state, and may be executed when the power is turned on with the RAM clear. On the other hand, there is a possibility that either state may be known depending on the presence or absence of the second effect, depending on whether the power is turned on simply or when the power is turned on with RAM clear (setting change), so both may not be executed. You may. In this case, a third effect (normal effect) may be performed in spite of the second state. Furthermore, it is not necessary to perform the second effect even when the specified number of games is exhausted without entering the first state in the advantageous section.

Further, as the second effect, an effect used for other purposes may be diverted. For example, the effect used for the AT preparation state (the state for shifting the RT) may be diverted. With such a configuration, an effect that may actually be performed in a state that is not advantageous to the player is also performed in another advantageous state, so that the player can be encouraged to continue the game. There is.

Further, although the example in which the effect lamp is lit only in the first state is shown, it may be lit in at least a part of the third state.

Further, the first state may be a state in which an advantageous state is added to the third state (for example, an advantageous section + bell navigation (push order navigation)).

In addition, when the first winning combination is won in the second state, there is no privilege (only the transition to the third state), and the first state and the third state are the first. If the winning combination is won, a privilege may be given, and the types of the privilege may be different (additional number of games, first hit, etc.).

<Embodiment 2-4>
Next, a specific example of the effect according to the fourth embodiment of the second embodiment will be described in detail. 32 and 33 are diagrams showing an example of various lottery tables for executing the effect according to the fourth embodiment of the second embodiment, and FIG. 32 is a diagram corresponding to the above FIG. 22. Since the tables are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 22 except for FIGS. 32 (c) and 33 (c-2), only FIGS. 32 (c) and 33 (c-2) will be described below. explain.

Further, in this example, an example in which the same lottery table is used in settings 1 to 6 will be described, but at least one lottery table having different winning probabilities may be prepared for each set value. In addition, at least one lottery table with different winning probabilities may be prepared for each winning combination, and the winning or losing may be determined according to the winning combination that has been internally won (or won).

<Embodiment 2-4 / Pullback zone precursor game number determination table>
The pullback zone precursor game number determination table shown in FIGS. 32 (c) and 33 (c-2) is a lottery to be referred to when performing the "AT precursor game number determination lottery" in the replay low probability state (pullback zone). It's a table. Here, the "AT precursor game number determination lottery" is a lottery for determining the number of games for which an AT precursor effect (including a fake effect (gase effect)) that suggests that the game state shifts to the AT state is performed. Is.

In this example, when the pullback zone is one game, the lottery is performed with reference to the pullback zone precursor game number determination table (for one game) shown in FIG. 32 (c). In this pullback zone precursor game number determination table (for one game), two types of lottery data (return, Gase) are stored corresponding to the number of precursor games of 0 or 1.

On the other hand, when the pullback zone is a plurality of games (4 games in this example), the lottery is performed with reference to the pullback zone precursor game number determination table (for a plurality of games) shown in FIG. 33 (c-2). In this pullback zone precursor game number determination table (for a plurality of games), two types (return, Gase) of lottery data are stored corresponding to the precursor games of 0 to 4 according to the number of remaining games.

In this example, the first sub-control unit 400 is a disorder acquired from a random number value generation circuit or the like when the condition for shifting from the re-game low probability state (pull-back zone) to the re-game high probability state (AT state) is satisfied. It is determined which number of precursor games the numerical value (0 to 127 in this example) is the lottery value associated with, and the process of determining the number of games for which the AT precursor effect is performed is executed.

For example, when the number of remaining games in the pullback zone is one (including the case where the pullback zone is one game), the pullback zone precursor game number determination table (for one game) or the pullback zone precursor game number determination table (plurality). As shown in (for games), the number of precursor games of 0 (1 stop) is 0 (1 stop), 0 (2 stops), 0 (3 stops, winning judgment), 1 (input), 1 (lever) return. Since the winning lottery values corresponding to are 32, 32, 32, 16, 16 respectively, the winning probabilities of each return are 32/128, 32/128, 32/128, 16/128, 16/128. Is.

On the other hand, the number of precursor games of 0 (1 stop) is 0 (1 stop), 0 (2 stops), 0 (3 stops, winning judgment), 1 (input), 1 (lever). Since the values are 64, 4, 16, 0, 0, respectively, the winning probabilities of each return are 64/128, 48/128, 16/128, 0/128, 0/128, and 0 (1). The probability of winning the Gase (stop) is the highest, and in the remaining 1 game (1 (input), 1 (lever)), the Gase will not be won.

Note that 0 (1 stop) means that the AT precursor effect is performed until the reception of the first stop operation of the game in which the lottery for determining the number of AT precursor games (hereinafter referred to as the game) is performed, and 0 (2 stops) is , Indicates that the AT precursor effect is performed until the reception of the second stop operation of the game, and 0 (3 stops, winning judgment) indicates that the AT precursor effect is performed until the reception of the third stop operation of the game. There is. Further, 1 (input) indicates that the AT precursor effect is performed until the acceptance of the bet operation of the next game (hereinafter, the next game) of the game, and 1 (lever) indicates that the start lever operation of the next game is performed. It indicates that the AT precursor production will be performed until the reception.

When the number of remaining games in the pullback zone is a plurality of games (4 games), as shown in (D) of the pullback zone precursor game number determination table (for a plurality of games) shown in FIG. 33 (c-2). Since the lottery values for winning the return corresponding to the number of precursor games 1, 2, 3 and 4, are 16, 32, 64 and 16, respectively, the winning probability of the return with the number of precursor games 1, 2, 3 and 4 Are 16/128, 32/128, 64/128, and 16/128, respectively, and the winning probability of returning to the precursor game number 3 is the highest.

On the other hand, since the lottery values for winning the Gase corresponding to the number of precursor games 1, 2, 3 and 4, are 64, 48, 16 and 0, respectively, the number of precursor games is 1, 2, 3 and 4. The winning probabilities are 64/128, 48/128, 16/128, and 0/128, respectively, and the winning probability of the Gase with the number of precursor games 1 is the highest, and the Gase with the number of precursor games 4 is not won.

<Embodiment 2-4 / Direction>
34 to 36 are diagrams showing an example of the effect according to the fourth embodiment of the second embodiment in chronological order, and FIG. 34 (a) shows an example of the effect of a pattern that does not return to AT. Further, FIG. 35 (a) shows an effect example of a pattern returning to AT, and FIGS. 35 (b) and 36 (a) show modification examples 1 and 2 of an effect example of a pattern returning to AT. There is.

<Embodiment 2-4 / Production (without AT return) / First production>
First, an example of producing a pattern that does not return to AT will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (a).

In the states shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (1), the gaming state of the slot machine is the first state (AT state in this example), and in the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used. , The AT effect is executed corresponding to the first state (AT state).

In this example, as the AT effect corresponding to the first state (AT state), the background image display G11 suggesting that the AT is in progress and the AT digestion game number display G12 (136G in this example), The display G13 of the number of remaining games (74G in this example) and the display G14 (236GET in this example) of the number of acquired game media during AT are executed.

Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (1), the first effect (lamp effect) suggesting the period of the first state (AT state) by using the effect lamp 421 (light output means). Is running. In this example, as the first effect (lamp effect) suggesting the period of the first state (AT state), the effect lamp 421 with the characters of Change is lit.

The first effect (in this example, the lamp effect) according to the present invention may be an effect that suggests a period of the first state (AT state) and a period of the second state (details will be described later). The aspect is not particularly limited.

<Embodiment 2-4 / Direction (without AT return)>
The following states shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (2) are states in which the first state (AT state) has ended, and in the same state, the AT effect corresponding to the first state (AT state) has ended. There is.

In this example, the display G11 of the background image suggesting that the AT has ended, the display G14 of the number of acquired game media during the AT (485 GET in this example), and the AT end notification G15 (in this example) notifying the end of the AT. In this example, the character display of the end of ART) is executed respectively.

<Embodiment 2-4 / Production (without AT return) / Second state, Second production>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (3), the gaming state of the slot machine is the first state when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). It is a state in which the player has shifted from the (AT state) to the second state (in this example, the CZ of the low probability state (pull-back zone) of the replaying combination), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first state. Using the effect lamp 421 (light output means), the first effect (lamp effect) that suggests the period of the second state (CZ of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) is executed. ..

In this example, as the first effect (lamp effect) that suggests the period of the second state (CZ of the re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)), the effect lamp 421 with the characters of Change is used. It is lit.

During the period shown in FIGS. 34 (a) (4) to 34 (a) (6), the weak cherry was won (the combination of "cherry-ANY-replay" symbols was prepared on the winning line L1). Then, using the effect image display device 157 (display means), the second effect (weak cherry effect) including the fourth effect (small role announcement) KK is executed to notify that the weak cherry has won a prize. There is.

Further, since the period shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (3) to 34 (a) and (6) is the second state (CZ in the low probability state (pull-back zone) of the re-game combination), the AT return lottery is held. Running. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the AT return lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (a), and a random number value (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from a random number value generation circuit or the like wins each prize. It is determined whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the winning lottery value associated with the winning combination, and the process of determining the winning or losing (non-winning) of the AT return lottery is executed.

In this example, the weak cherry was won, but the result of the return lottery was non-winning (missing), so the second state (CZ of the low probability state of the replay role (pullback zone)) is changed to the first state. Does not shift (return) to (AT state).

Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (6), when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the operation of a certain operation means (third stop operation) is accepted), the production is performed. The third effect (lamp effect) is completed by turning off the lamp 421.

The end trigger of the third effect (lamp effect) is not limited to the acceptance of the third stop operation, and may be after the execution period of the second effect (weak cherry effect). Therefore, for example, the start lever 135, the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be operated after the game following the game in which the second effect (weak cherry effect) is executed. .. Further, during the game in which the second effect (weak cherry effect) is executed, the third effect (lamp effect) may be turned off first.

<Embodiment 2-4 / Direction (without AT return) / Third state>
In the following states shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (7), the gaming state of the slot machine is changed to the second state when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). (CZ of re-game combination low probability state (pull-back zone)) to a third state (in this example, re-game combination low probability state (normal)) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state. In the same state, the effect image display device 157 (display means) is used to execute the normal effect corresponding to the third state (replaying combination low probability state (normal)).

<Embodiment 2-4 / Direction (with AT return)>
Next, an example of producing a pattern for returning to AT will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (a). It should be noted that the states shown in FIGS. 35 (a) (1) to (a) and (4) are shown in FIGS. Since it is in the same state as in FIG. 35 (a), the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be given from the state shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (5).

<Embodiment 2-4 / Direction (with AT return) / AT notification>
Since the period shown in FIGS. 35 (a) (3) to 35 (a) (5) is the second state (CZ in the low probability state (pull-back zone) of the re-game combination), the AT return lottery is executed. ing. Here, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the AT return lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (a), and a random number value (0 to 63335 in this example) acquired from a random number value generation circuit or the like wins each prize. It is determined whether the lottery value is the winning lottery value or the winning lottery value associated with the winning combination, and the process of determining the winning or losing (non-winning) of the AT return lottery is executed.

In this example, if a strong cherry is won (the combination of "cherry-ANY-cherry" symbols is aligned on the winning line L1) and the strong cherry is won, the probability of winning the AT return lottery is 100%. Therefore, it is judged that the AT return lottery has been won.

In addition, in the same state, since the AT return lottery was won, the production image display device 157 (display means) was used to perform an AT notification AK suggesting a transition to the AT state, and a prize was won. Therefore, using the effect image display device 157 (display means), a second effect (strong cherry effect) including a fourth effect (small role announcement) KK is performed to notify that the strong cherry has won a prize. .. That is, in this example, during the period of the second state of one game, the return lottery is won and the AT notification AK is completed.

<Embodiment 2-4 / Direction (with AT return) / Modified example of AT notification>
Next, a modified example of the effect example of the pattern returning to AT will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 (b) and 36 (a).

In the production example shown in FIG. 35 (a), an example in which the return lottery is won and the AT notification AK is completed during the period of the second state of one game is shown. As shown, even if the return lottery is won during the period of the second state of one game, the AT notification is made after the transition to the first state (AT state) (after the next game or later). You may perform AK. With such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player unexpectedness and joy by making the player think that the AT state has ended.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 35 (a), an example in which the AT notification AK and the small role notification KK are executed at the same timing is shown, but as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the small role notification KK is more than the small role notification KK. The AT notification AK may be executed first. With such a configuration, the joy of the AT notification and the joy of the small role notification KK can be given at different timings, and the player's motivation to play may be increased stepwise.

<Embodiment 2-4 / Invention 2-8>
FIG. 37 is a time chart of the effect according to the fourth embodiment of the second embodiment. As described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 37, in the effect according to this example, by performing the first effect DR1 (lamp effect), the period of the first state ST1 (AT state) and the second effect The second state is obtained by suggesting the period of the state ST2 (replay low probability state (pull-back zone)) and ending the first effect DR1 (lamp effect) as shown by reference numeral T23 in FIG. 37. It is suggested that the transition from ST2 (replay low probability state (pullback zone)) to the third state ST3 (replay low probability state (normal)) has occurred.

In addition, the second production DR2 (weak cherry production) is executed in connection with the determination of the first winning combination (weak cherry) in the second state ST2 (replay low probability state (pull-back zone)). The second effect DR2 (weak cherry effect), which is started in the second state ST2 (replay low probability state (pull-back zone)), is during the period when the first effect DR1 (lamp effect) is being executed. finish.

Therefore, according to the effect according to this example, even if the effect according to the first winning combination is executed in the third state, which is the most disadvantageous of the first state (AT state) to the third state. Since the player cannot expect it, the second production can be finished at an appropriate timing.

As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of symbols (for example, the symbols shown in FIG. 3) and is rotationally driven by a plurality of reels. (For example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), a stop operation means capable of executing an operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and An internal winning result determining means (for example, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 7A) for determining the result of the internal winning based on the lottery value, the internal winning result determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the above. A stop result deriving means (for example, the winning determination process shown in FIG. 7A) for deriving the stop results of the plurality of reels based on the operation result of the stop operation means, and an effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. (For example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the effect lamp 421 shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 2, the various lamps 339, 420 shown in FIG. 2, and the movable body). The internal winning result determining means is a means capable of determining the first winning combination, and one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect ( For example, it is a lamp effect), and one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, a weak cherry effect), and the first state (for example, AT state) to the first effect. The second state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the state (for example, may shift to the re-game low probability state (pull-back zone)), is more disadvantageous to the player than the second state from the second state. There is a case of shifting to a third state (for example, a replay low probability state (normal)), and when the first effect is executed, either the first state or the second state is executed. It is suggested that it is one of the states, and it is suggested that when the first effect is completed, the state shifts from the second state to the third state, and the second effect is the result of the internal winning. The effect executed in connection with the determination of the first winning combination (for example, weak cherry) by the determining means, and the second effect started in the second state is the first effect. It is a game table (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the present invention 2-8"), which is an effect that ends during the period in which the effect of is being executed.

According to the game table according to the invention 2-8 of the present application, it is possible to provide a game table having a characteristic in the production means. Specifically, the player cannot expect even if the production according to the first winning combination is executed in the third state, which is the most disadvantageous of the first to third states, so at an appropriate timing. It may be possible to finish the second production. The second effect may be started in the second state and ended in the second state.

The configuration of the gaming table according to the invention 2-8 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table according to the second embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first gaming state", the "second gaming state", and the "third gaming state" according to the invention 2-8 of the present application are guaranteed to have an advantageous and disadvantageous relationship with the player. If so, various combinations are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, the combination of AT state> pullback zone> normal (advantageous section, AT lottery probability (low) is disclosed, but AT state (addition probability is high), AT state (addition probability is in progress), AT state (in addition probability). Addition probability low), pullback zone (pullback probability high), pullback zone (pullback probability low), normal (AT lottery probability high), normal (AT lottery probability medium), normal (AT lottery probability low), AT no lottery (non-lottery) Any three states among a plurality of states such as (advantageous section) can be applied. Also, two or more states among the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state. However, it may be in the AT state, or all the states may be in the normal state.

Further, the "first effect" and the "second effect" according to the invention 2-8 of the present application are effects that are executed in a certain state, but are continuously performed during the period of the certain state. Not only the effect to be executed, but also the one to be executed for a part of the period of a certain state, and the one to be performed intermittently for each game in a certain state are also included. For example, it is a production that occurs only when a replay (cherry, a special replay or other small role, a loss, or a combination of one or more of all small roles including a loss) is won. It may be an effect that occurs only during a certain period such as during a lever operation-reel rotation, stop operation, winning judgment, etc., or a combination of these, or even if there is a game in which the effect is not executed. good. Further, when the effect is generated intermittently, the player can be made to guess or expect a relatively advantageous state. On the other hand, when the effect is continuously executed, the effect is that the state can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the combination of the effect and the effect being executed.

Further, the second state is a state in which a lottery (for example, a return lottery) for shifting to the first state is executed when the first winning combination is determined by the internal winning result determining means. The third state is a state in which the lottery for shifting to the first state is not executed when the first winning combination is determined by the internal winning result determining means, and the second effect is It is an effect provided with a plurality of patterns, and one of the plurality of patterns is a pattern suggesting a transition from the second state to the first state (hereinafter, "first pattern"). (For example, the strong cherry effect shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (5)), and one of the plurality of patterns shifts from the second state to the first state. A pattern that does not suggest (hereinafter, referred to as a "second pattern"; for example, a weak cherry effect shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (5)) may be used.

With such a configuration, when the first winning combination is won by executing the second effect that is expected to return to the first state during the period when the first effect is being performed. It may be possible to have expectations.

In addition, the third state may shift to the fourth state, and the fourth state is the first state when the first winning combination is determined by the internal winning result determining means. The lottery (for example, the return lottery) is executed, and the second effect started in the second state is executed with the first number of games (for example, one game). The second effect started in the fourth state is executed with a second number of games (for example, four games), and the first number of games is shorter than the number of second games. There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly return to the first state after the end of the first state, and it may be possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from diminishing.

Further, the second state is a state in which the game ends when the game of the third number of games (for example, 4 games) is executed, and the number of the first games is equal to or less than the number of the third games. It may be the number of games.

With such a configuration, the value of the second effect started in the second state may be enhanced. The number of games of the third is the same as the number of games of the first game, and each of them may be one game.

Further, the effect means is a means capable of continuously executing the first effect when shifting from the second state to the first state (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). In the first case, the second effect by the first pattern may be a game in which the first state is started and may be executed before the stop operation means is operated. You may.

With such a configuration, when returning to the first state, the first effect continues, so that the player may be surprised by the notification after the start.

Further, the second effect according to the first pattern is an effect suggesting that the first winning combination has been won (hereinafter, referred to as a "third effect", for example, FIG. 35A). The case including the small role notification KK shown in 5) and the effect suggesting the transition to the first state (hereinafter, referred to as "fourth effect") (hereinafter, referred to as "second case", for example. , AT notification AK shown in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (5)), and the second effect according to the second pattern does not include the fourth effect, and the first winning combination It is an effect suggesting that the player has won (hereinafter referred to as "fifth effect"), and the third effect and the fifth effect may be the same effect.

With such a configuration, when the third effect and the fifth effect are the same, it may be easy to have the expectation of returning to the first state.

Further, in the second case, it is suggested that the first winning combination is won by the third effect (for example, the small combination notification KK shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (5)). In some cases, it may be suggested (for example, the AT notification AK shown in FIGS. 36 (a) and 36 (4)) that the fourth effect shifts to the first state.

With such a configuration, the player may be surprised by the suggestion of shifting to the first state before the suggestion of winning the first winning combination.

Further, the second effect according to the first pattern is an effect that may not include the third effect, and the internal winning result determining means is the first effect in a normal state other than the second state. The third effect may be executed when the winning combination is determined.

With such a configuration, the player may be surprised by notifying the return to the first state without notifying the first winning combination.

The effect corresponding to the second state and the effect corresponding to the third state may be the same effect (for example, a normal effect). Further, the effect corresponding to the second state and the effect corresponding to the third state may be different effects (for example, CZ effect, normal effect).

Further, in the second state, no production (gase) may be performed. Further, if the first winning combination does not return to the first state (for example, AT), the first effect is terminated, but the first effect may be terminated at the time of three stops and a winning determination. If the first effect is continued after the winning determination, the interest may be improved by functioning as a notification of the return to the first state (for example, AT).

Further, regardless of whether or not to return to the first state (for example, AT), the second state may be completed in the specified number of games. Further, the first effect (the effect suggesting the period in the first state and the period in the second state) is not limited to the lamp effect, and is an effect using a display means, a sound output means, a movable body, or the like. It may be.

Further, the second effect (the effect executed in connection with the determination of the first winning combination by the internal winning result determining means) is not limited to the weak cherry effect, and the light output means, the sound output means, and the like. It may be an effect using a movable body or the like.

Further, even in a configuration in which continuous production (for example, a series of productions with a story) is performed from the first state to the second state, and the end of the continuous production ends during the execution period of the first production. good.

<Embodiment 2 / Modified Example>
Next, a modified example of the slot machine according to the above-described embodiment 2-1 to 2-8 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. The configuration of the game console according to the invention 2-1 to 2-8 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the above-described embodiment 2-1 to 2-8, and is in addition to (or replaced with) the configuration. It is also possible to adopt some or all of the configurations described below.

38 and 39 show the relationship between the flow of the game of the game console according to the inventions 2-1 to 2-8 of the present application, the contents of various effects performed during the game, and the contents of various operations performed during the game. It is an example of the time chart shown in the time series of.

In this example, as an example of the flow of the game, the first state (AT state) → the second state (advantageous section in which the AT lottery can be executed) → the first state (AT state) or the third state (AT state). A case where the game state shifts in the order of (normal) will be described. In this example, during the game, the effect image display device 157 is used for the effect and the effect lamp 421 is used for the effect.

<Embodiment 2 / Deformation example / Production by production image display device 157>
In the first state (AT state), as an effect by the effect image display device 157 corresponding to the first state, an AT winning notification suggesting that the AT has been won is sent from 1G before the start of the AT (of the game). Execute until (when operating the bet button). Next, the AT-in-AT effect suggesting that the AT state is executed is executed from the start of AT (when the bet button is operated in the game) to 1G before the end of AT (when the bet button is operated in the game). Next, the AT end effect suggesting that the AT state has ended is executed from 1G before the end of AT (when the bet button is operated in the game) to the 1G after the end of AT (when the bet button is operated in the game). do.

Further, when the state shifts from the first state (AT state) to the second state (advantageous section (chance zone) in which the AT lottery can be executed), the effect image display device 157 corresponding to the second state is used. As an effect, a normal effect suggesting that the second state (an advantageous section in which the AT lottery can be executed) is performed, and the second state ends from the 1G (when the bet button is operated in the game) after the end of AT. (When operating the 1G bet button in the state after the transition to the second state).

In addition, when the second state (advantageous section in which the AT lottery can be executed) is shifted (returned) to the first state (AT state), the effect image display corresponding to the first state (AT state) is displayed. As the effect by the device 157, the effect during AT, which suggests that the state is AT, is started from the time of operating the bet button of the 1G after the transition. On the other hand, when the transition from the second state (advantageous section in which the AT lottery can be executed) to the third state (normal) is performed, the effect image display device 157 corresponding to the third state (normal) is used. , The normal effect suggesting that it is in the normal state is started from the time of operating the 1G bet button after the transition.

In this example, the start and end triggers of the effect by the effect image display device 157 are set to the time of operating the bet button, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated (the first). 1 stop operation (1 stop), 2nd stop operation (2 stops), 3rd stop operation (3 stops)), start lever 135 (lever) may be operated, winning judgment, etc. It may be. Further, the type, period, mode, etc. of the effect corresponding to each state are not particularly limited to this example.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 39, the pullback 1G (third state (normal) of one game) described above is performed before the transition from the second state to the first state (or the third state). In the case of a game table that performs You may.

<Embodiment 2 / Deformation example / Production by production lamp 421>
As shown in FIG. 38, in the first state (AT state), as the effect by the effect lamp 421 corresponding to the first state, the effect during AT (effect lamp 421) suggesting that the state is AT is turned on. The production) is executed from the start of AT (when the bet button of the game is operated) to the 1st G after the end of AT (when the bet button of the game is operated).

Further, when the transition from the first state (AT state) to the second state (advantageous section in which the AT lottery can be executed) is performed, the second state is produced by the effect lamp 421 corresponding to the second state. (The effect of turning on the effect lamp 421) that suggests that the state is (advantageous section where the AT lottery can be executed) is the second from the 1G (when the bet button of the game is operated) after the end of AT. It is executed until the state of is completed (when the 1G bet button is operated in the state after the transition of the second state).

In addition, when the second state (advantageous section in which the AT lottery can be executed) is shifted (returned) to the first state (AT state), the effect lamp corresponding to the first state (AT state). As the effect by 421, the effect during AT, which suggests that the player is in the AT state, is started from the time of operating the 1G bet button after the transition. On the other hand, although not shown, when the second state (advantageous section in which the AT lottery can be executed) shifts to the third state (normal), the effect lamp 421 is turned off and the effect lamp 421 is turned off. Will not be directed by.

In this example, the start and end triggers of the production by the production lamp 421 are set to the time of operating the bet button, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated (first). Either the stop operation (1 stop), the 2nd stop operation (2 stops), or the 3rd stop operation (3 stops)) may be performed, the start lever 135 (lever) may be operated, or a prize may be determined. There may be. Further, the type, period, mode, etc. of the effect corresponding to each state are not particularly limited to this example.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 39, the effect during AT (the effect of lighting the effect lamp 421) suggesting that the game is in the AT state is started from the start of AT (at the time of the third stop operation of the game). May be good.

40 and 41 are time charts showing the vicinity of the chance zone marked with reference numeral X in an enlarged manner in FIG. 38, and FIG. 40 shows a modified example of the effect by the effect lamp 421 when the AT is not returned. FIG. 401 shows a modified example of the effect produced by the effect lamp 421 when returning to the AT.

As shown in FIG. 40, as the turn-off timing of the effect lamp 421 when the AT is not returned, for example, a pattern (P1) in which the effect lamp 421 is turned off at the first stop of the first game in the second state (chance zone), the same game. The pattern that turns off at 2 stops (P2), the pattern that turns off at 3 stops of the same game (P3), and the bet of the first game after shifting from the second state (chance zone) to the third state (normal) Examples thereof include a pattern (P4) in which the light is turned off when the button is operated.

Further, the start trigger and the end trigger of the small role notification are not limited to the example described in the above-described second embodiment. For example, the start trigger of the small role notification is the start of the first game in the second state (chance zone). It may be at the time of lever operation, or it may be 1st stop, 2nd stop, 3rd stop, etc. of the same game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the effect lamp 421 when returning to AT is in all of the first state (AT state) → the second state (chance zone) → the first state (AT state). It may be a pattern (P5) in which lighting is continued for a period of time. With such a configuration, the effect lamp 421 when it does not return to the AT is turned off at any timing of the pattern (P1) to the pattern (P4) shown in FIG. Every time the operation is performed, attention is paid to whether or not the effect lamp 421 is turned off (whether or not the AT state is restored), and it may be possible to make the player play the game with expectations. ..

Further, the start trigger and the end trigger of the AT notification are not limited to the example described in the second embodiment. For example, the start trigger of the AT notification is the start lever operation of the first game in the second state (chance zone). It may be time, 1st stop, 2nd stop, or 3rd stop of the game, or after the transition from the second state (chance zone) to the first state (AT state). It may be when the bet button is operated in the first game.

<< Embodiment 3 >>
Next, the game console (slot machine) according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 54. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, only the configurations different from those of the slot machine 100 according to the first and second embodiments will be described below.

<Embodiment 3 / Lottery table>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for executing the effect according to the third embodiment. In this example, an example in which the same lottery table is used in settings 1 to 6 will be described, but at least one lottery table having different winning probabilities may be prepared for each set value.

<Lottery table / Table for determining the number of games to be added to the AT when the chance role is won>
The AT addition game number determination table at the time of winning the chance combination shown in FIG. 42A is a lottery table referred to by the main control unit 300 when performing the “AT addition game number lottery” at the time of winning the chance combination. , Lottery data is stored corresponding to each of a plurality of types of chance roles. Here, the "AT additional game number lottery" is a lottery for determining the number of AT games to be added (added) when the gaming state is the AT state.

In this example, when the main control unit 300 wins a chance combination (specific winning combination) in the AT state, the main control unit 300 determines the number of AT addition games by referring to the AT addition game number determination table at the time of winning the chance combination. .. For example, when the chance role is watermelon, 0G is selected when the random number value is 0 to 95, 10G is selected when the random number value is 96 to 111, and 30G is selected when the random number value is 112 to 120. Select, 50G is selected when the random number value is 121 to 126, and 100G is selected when the random number value is 127.

The number of AT additional games corresponding to other chance roles is as shown in the figure, but when the chance role is a strong cherry, the number of AT additional games is 10 G or more (0G is not selected). In addition, since 100G is selected when the random number value is 121 to 127, the strong cherry is the most advantageous winning role in the AT addition game number lottery among the chance roles.

<Embodiment 3 / Lottery table / Chance role winning production decision table>
The production determination table at the time of winning the chance combination shown in FIG. 42B is a lottery table referred to by the main control unit 300 when performing the “production lottery” at the time of winning the chance combination. Lottery data is stored corresponding to each of the number of additional games. Here, the "production lottery" is a lottery for determining the content of the production to be executed.

In this example, when the main control unit 300 wins a chance combination (specific winning combination) in the AT state, after determining the number of AT addition games in the above-mentioned "AT addition game number lottery", this chance combination is won. With reference to the time production determination table, the content of the production to be executed is determined based on the determined number of AT additional games.

The production lottery may be executed by the first sub-control unit 400. In this case, the main control unit 300 executes the above-mentioned AT addition game number lottery, and then AT the first sub-control unit 400. The number of additional games The command including the lottery result (the number of AT additional games) of the lottery is transmitted, and the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the effect determination table at the time of winning the chance combination, and the AT addition received from the main control unit 300. It may be configured to determine the content of the effect to be executed based on the number of games.

In the effect determination table at the time of winning the chance combination shown in FIG. 42 (b), for example, when the number of AT-added games is 0G, no effect is selected when the random number value is 0 to 95, and the random number values are 96 to 127. At the time, select the 1G completion button. When the number of AT additional games is 10G, the 1G completion button is selected when the random number value is 0 to 124, the 2G interlocking button is selected when the random number value is 125 to 126, and the random number value is 127. Sometimes the 3G interlocking button G is selected. On the other hand, when the number of AT additional games is 100G, 1G complete freeze is selected when the random number value is 0 to 8, 2G post-freeze is selected when the random number value is 9 to 15, and the random number value is 16 to 16. At 127, the freeze after 3G is selected, and the 1G completion button, the 2G interlocking button, and the 3G interlocking button are not selected.

Here, the 1G complete button and the 1G complete freeze are effects performed in one game (complete effect), and the 2G interlocking button and the 2G post-freeze are effects performed over a plurality of games (2G) (interlocking). The 3G interlocking button and the 3G post-freeze are effects (interlocking effects) performed over a plurality of games (3G). In addition, the 1G complete button and the 1G complete freeze are effects without a precursor effect (effect without a precursor), and the 2G interlocking button and 2G post-freeze are effects with a 1G precursor effect (effect with a precursor) and are linked with 3G. Buttons and 3G post-freeze are effects with 2G precursors (precursor effects). Further, the 1G complete button, the 2G interlocking button, and the 3G interlocking button are effects without freezing, and the 1G complete freeze, 2G interlocking freeze, and 3G interlocking freeze are effects accompanied by freeze.

The contents of the effects corresponding to the number of other AT-added games are as shown in the figure, but there are also a plurality of complete effects (1G complete button or 1G complete freeze in this example) performed in one game. The lottery data of the lottery table so that the number of corresponding AT additional games is larger in the interlocking effect (in this example, 2G interlocking button, 2G post-freeze, 3G interlocking button, or 3G post-freeze) performed over the game. Is set. Therefore, when the interlocking effect is executed, the player's expectation for the number of AT-added games can be increased as compared with the case where the completed effect is executed.

<Embodiment 3 / Internal lottery process>
Next, the internal lottery process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery process according to the third embodiment.

The internal lottery process according to the third embodiment is a process corresponding to the internal lottery process (step S103) described with reference to FIG. 7 (a), and the slot machine according to the third embodiment is the process corresponding to the internal lottery process (step S103). Instead of the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 43, the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 43 is executed.

In step S2001 of this internal lottery process, a lottery process such as a winning combination is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this lottery process for winning combinations, etc., when an internal winning combination is won, a process for executing an AT addition game number lottery and a production lottery is performed.

In the next step S2003, it is determined whether the freeze flag is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S2005, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2005, the freeze timing data is set, and in the next step S2007, the freeze flag is set to OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S2009. In step S2009, the internal lottery process ends after preparing the command to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Here, the "freeze timing data" set in step S2005 is data for storing the timing for starting the freeze. In this example, since the freeze is started when there is a third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the freeze timing data includes data indicating a "third stop" indicating the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139. To set. The freeze timing data indicates "first stop" indicating the first stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139, "second stop" indicating the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the stop operation of the start lever 135. Data other than "third stop" such as "lever operation" may be set.

In step S2011, the lottery result of the lottery process such as the winning combination in step S2011 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the game is a production that freezes. In the case, the process proceeds to step S2015. In step S2013, the freeze flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2015, it is determined whether the precursor flag 1 is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S2017, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2023. In step S2017, 1 is subtracted from the number of precursor games 1, and in the next step S2019, it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor game 1 after the update is 0. If it is 0, the precursor game is played in the game. In order to finish 1 (precursor game with freeze, hereinafter also referred to as "freeze precursor") and start freezing from the next game, after setting the precursor flag 1 to OFF in step S2021, the process proceeds to step S2013, other than 0. In the case of, the next game proceeds to step S2009 in order to continue the precursor game 1 (precursor of freeze).

In step S2023, it is determined whether the precursor flag 2 is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S2025, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S2031. In step S2025, 1 is subtracted from the number of precursor games 2, and in the next step S2027, it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor game 2 after the update is 0. If it is 0, the precursor game is played in the game. In order to end 2 (precursor game without freeze. Hereinafter, also simply referred to as "precursor"), after setting the precursor flag 2 to OFF in step S2029, the process proceeds to step S2009, and if it is other than 0, the next time. The game also proceeds to step S2009 in order to continue the precursor game 2 (precursor).

In step S2031, it is determined whether or not the effect content determined in the lottery process such as the winning combination in step S2001 includes the precursor game 1 (freeze precursor), and if it is included, the process proceeds to step S2033. If not, the step S2033 is performed. Proceed to S2037. In step S2033, the precursor flag 1 was set to ON, and in the next step S2035, the number of freeze precursor games (precursor game number 1) was set according to the effect content determined in the lottery process such as the winning combination in step S2001. Later, the process proceeds to step S2009.

For example, when the effect content determined in the lottery process such as the winning combination in step S2001 is a freeze after 2G (or a freeze after 3G), the effect is an effect accompanied by a freeze, and includes the precursor game 1 (precursor of freeze). Therefore, after setting the precursor flag 1 to ON in step S2033, the number of freeze precursor games (precursor game number 1) is set to 1G (or 2G) in step S2035.

In step S2037, it is determined whether or not the effect content determined in the lottery process such as the winning combination in step S2001 includes the precursor game 2 (precursor), and if it is included, the process proceeds to step S2039, and if not, step S2009 is performed. Proceed to. In step S2039, the precursor flag 2 is set to ON, and in the next step S2041, after the precursor game number (precursor game number 2) is set according to the effect content determined in the lottery process such as the winning combination in step S2001. , Step S2009.

For example, in the case where the effect content determined in the lottery process such as the winning combination in step S2001 is a 2G interlocking button (or a 3G interlocking button), the precursor game 1 (freeze precursor) is not included and the precursor game 2 (precursor). In step S2039, the precursor flag 2 is set to ON, and then in step S2041, the number of precursor games (precursor game number 2) is set to 1G (or 2G).

<Embodiment 3 / Lottery processing for winning combinations, etc.>
Next, the winning combination lottery process (step S2001) in the internal lottery process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a flow of a lottery process such as a winning combination in the internal lottery process according to the third embodiment.

In step S2101, the first sub-control is a process related to the lottery table of the winning combination shown in FIG. 6, a lottery using the acquired random number value (winning combination internal lottery), and an internal lottery processing command including information about the internal winning combination. Prepare to send to the unit 400. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the internally won combination (internal winning combination) is a chance combination (in this example, the chance combination shown in FIG. 42A), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2105. If not applicable, the process proceeds to step S2107.

In step S2105, the above-mentioned lottery for the number of AT additional games is performed, and the number of AT games to be added (added) is determined. In the next step S2107, the above-mentioned effect lottery is performed, and after determining the content of the effect to be executed based on the number of AT addition games determined in the AT addition game number lottery in step S2105, the lottery process for winning combinations and the like is completed. ..

<Embodiment 3 / Status update process>
Next, the state update process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45 (a). FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the flow of the state update process according to the third embodiment.

The state update process according to the third embodiment is a process corresponding to the state update process (step S109) described with reference to FIG. 7 (a), and the slot machine according to the third embodiment is the process corresponding to the state update process (step S109). Instead of the state update process shown in FIG. 45A, the state update process shown in FIG. 45A is executed.

Specifically, in step S2201, a process related to the transition of the game state is performed, and when the start condition and the end condition are satisfied, the process of shifting the game state and the game state update command including information on the game state (RT) are performed. Is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S2203, the freeze timing data set in step S2005 of the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 43 is referred to, it is determined whether or not it is the freeze execution timing, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2205, and if not applicable. Ends the status update process. In this example, since the freeze timing data is set to the data indicating the "third stop" indicating the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the freeze timing data freezes when there is a third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139. It is determined that it is the execution timing of, and the process proceeds to step S2205.

In step S2205, an initial value (for example, 15 seconds) is set in the standby timer, and in the next step S2207, it is determined whether or not the standby timer is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S2209, which is not 0. In that case, the determination process of step S2207 is repeatedly executed. Here, when the initial value of the standby timer is set, a predetermined cycle (in the present embodiment) in the timer update process (step S205) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). It is subtracted at about once every 2 ms). The slot machine is put into a freeze state (a state in which it cannot proceed to the subsequent processing) by repeatedly executing the determination process of step 2207 until the standby timer becomes 0. In step S2209, after initializing the freeze timing data, the state update process ends.

In the present embodiment, an example of starting the freeze when there is a third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is described. The freeze may be started when there is a stop operation. Next, with reference to FIG. 45B, a process of starting the freeze when each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is stopped will be described.

<Embodiment 3 / Reel stop control process>
FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the flow of the reel stop control process according to the modified example. The reel stop control process according to the modified example is a process corresponding to the reel stop control process (step S106) described with reference to FIG. 7A.

In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the effective stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2303, and if not applicable, the reel stop control process ends. In step S2303, the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the effective operation has been performed is stopped, and the process proceeds to step S2305.

In step S2305, the freeze timing data set in step S2005 of the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 43 is referred to, it is determined whether or not it is the freeze execution timing, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2307, and if not applicable. To step S2313. In this example, since the freeze timing data is set with data indicating "first stop", "second stop", and "third stop" indicating the first stop to the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139. , When each of the stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed, it is determined that the freeze execution timing is reached, and the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2307, an initial value (for example, 15 seconds) is set in the standby timer, and in the next step S2309, it is determined whether or not the standby timer is 0. If it is 0, the process proceeds to step S2311 and is not 0. In that case, the determination process of step S2309 is repeatedly executed. Here, when the initial value of the standby timer is set, a predetermined cycle (in the present embodiment) in the timer update process (step S205) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). It is subtracted at about once every 2 ms). The slot machine is put into a freeze state (a state in which it cannot proceed to the subsequent processing) by repeatedly executing the determination process of step 2309 until the standby timer becomes 0. In step S2311, after initializing the freeze timing data, the process proceeds to step S2313.

In step S2313, it is determined whether or not all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped. If not, the process returns to step S2301 to continue the process of stopping the rotating reels, and if stopped, the process of stopping the rotating reels is continued. The reel stop control process is terminated.

<Embodiment 3 / Bonus production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the outline of the privilege effect that can be executed by the slot machine according to the third embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 46 is a time chart for explaining the outline of the privilege effect that can be executed by the slot machine according to the third embodiment.

The "privilege effect" according to the present invention is a series of effects (continuous effects) including at least a first effect period T1 and a second effect period T2 following the first effect period T1. In this example, the case where the privilege production period T3 is the same as the total period T1 + T2 of the first production period T1 and the second production period T2 (T3 = T1 + T2) will be described, but the privilege production period T3 May be longer than the total period T1 + T2 of the first production period T1 and the second production period T2 (T3> T1 + T2).

In addition, the privilege effect includes the operation request display RP of the second operation means (the effect of urging the player to operate the second operation means), and the effect of notifying the privilege after the start of the second effect period T2. (Bonus notification effect) This is an effect in which the SP is executed. Here, the second operating means is one type of operating means among a plurality of types of operating means, and in this example, the chance button 136 corresponds to the other effect operating means (with the progress of the game). May be an operation means used for an unrelated operation (for example, effect, display switching, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, etc.).

<Embodiment 3 / Bonus production / First period>
The first effect period T1 in the privilege effect is a period during which the game can be progressed based on the operation of the first operating means (game progress valid period), which is indicated by reference numeral T4 in FIG. Here, the first operating means is one of a plurality of types of operating means, and in this example, any of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, the start lever 135, and the stop buttons 137 to 139. One of them is applicable, but it may be another operation means (operation means for advancing the game).

Further, the first effect period T1 is a period during which the operation request display RP is executed, and it is impossible to proceed with the effect based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example). The period. In the example shown in FIG. 46, the chance button 136 is pressed at the timing indicated by the operation D, but the pressing operation does not affect the ongoing effect and also starts a new effect. Not done (the effect is neither finished nor started by pressing the chance button 136).

<Embodiment 3 / Bonus production / Second period>
The second production period T2 in the privilege production is based on the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, the start lever 135, and the stop buttons 137 to 139) indicated by reference numerals T5 in FIG. This is a period including a period in which the progress of the game is impossible (game progress invalid period), that is, a freeze period in which the above-mentioned freeze state (reception of the first operating means is invalid).

<Embodiment 3 / Bonus production / Summary>
In this example, based on the reception of the operation of the first operation means (for example, the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139) at the timing shown by the operation A in FIG. 46, the first production period of the privilege production T1 has started. Since the first effect period T1 is a period during which the effect cannot proceed based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example), the chance button 136 is at the timing indicated by the operation D. However, the pressing operation does not affect the ongoing privilege production, and no new production has been started.

On the other hand, since the first effect period T1 is the period (game progress valid period) T4 in which the game can proceed based on the operation of the first operation means, the first effect period T1 is the timing shown by the operation B in FIG. The second effect period T2 of the privilege effect is started based on the acceptance of the operation of the operation means (for example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139). The second effect period T2 is a period including a period (freeze period in which the game is in a frozen state) T5 in which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operating means. In this example, the period in which the game is in the frozen state (game progress invalid period) T5 is set to a predetermined time (10 seconds), but it may be another time, and the time can be changed. You may. Further, the frozen state may be terminated by another condition (for example, an operation by a certain first operating means).

Further, in the privilege production, the privilege notification effect (privilege notification effect) SP is executed after the start of the second production period T2. Therefore, in this example, the second effect is performed at the timing shown by operation B in FIG. Based on the start of the production period T2, the privilege notification effect (privilege notification effect) SP has been started. The privilege effect may be such that the privilege notification effect (privilege notification effect) is started after the start of the second effect period T2, for example, after the start of the second effect period T2, or When a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when a certain time elapses, when a certain operation is performed, etc.), the privilege notification effect (privilege notification effect) may be started.

Further, in this example, the privilege effect is completed based on the reception of the operation of the first operation means (for example, the operation of pressing the medal insertion button 130) at the timing shown by the operation C in FIG. The privilege effect may be an effect including at least the first effect period T1 and the second effect period T2, and the operation of the first operation means (for example, the medal insertion button) may be performed at the timing shown by operation C in FIG. Even when the pressing operation of 130) is accepted, the privilege effect may be continued, or the privilege effect is based on the acceptance of the next operation of operation C (for example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135). You may end it.

According to the privilege effect according to this example, before the second effect period including at least the period (freeze period) in which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operation means, the second operation means By providing the first production period in which it is impossible to proceed with the production based on the operation, it is possible to give the player the impression that the freeze period is long without setting a long freeze period, which is surprising. It may be possible to provide a game. Further, even when the operation B is performed without performing the operation D in the first effect period T1, it is possible to make it appear as if the effect based on the operation D has occurred, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Embodiment 3 / Modified example of privilege production>
FIG. 47 is a time chart for explaining a modified example of the privilege effect that can be executed by the slot machine according to the third embodiment.

As shown by the effect patterns P1 and P2 in FIG. 47, the first effect period T1 is the case where the second operation means is operated after the operation request display RP is displayed on the display means (in this example, FIG. Even if the chance button 136 is operated at the timing indicated by the operation D1 or the operation D2 in 47), even during the period in which the effect including the effect in which the operation request display RP is continuously displayed is executed. good.

Further, as shown by the effect patterns P1 and P2 in FIG. 47, the operation request display RP is continuously displayed until the end of the first effect period T1, and the first operation request display RP is displayed during the period in which the operation request display RP is displayed. (In this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown by the operation B in FIG. 47) is different from a certain operation (in this example, the operation E is shown in FIG. 47). , The game progresses based on (the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139) (in this example, the reel is stopped in response to the second stop operation), and the operation request display RP is continuously displayed. It may be a thing.

Further, the privilege notification effect SP1 may be an effect that starts within the period of the second effect period T2 and ends at the same time as the end of the second effect period T2, as shown by the effect pattern P1 in FIG. 47. As shown by the effect pattern P2 in 47, the effect may be started at the same time as the end of the second effect period T2 (or after a predetermined time has elapsed after the end of the second effect period T2). Further, before the privilege notification effect SP1, another effect related to the privilege notification effect SP1 (in this example, an additional introduction effect suggesting that the number of AT additional games is given) may be performed.

Further, as shown by the effect pattern P3 in FIG. 47, the second privilege effect SP2 which is partially different from the privilege effect SP1 can be executed, and the period during which the second privilege effect SP2 is executed is the first. It is a period including a period in which the game can proceed based on the operation of the operating means, and includes a part of the production including the start of the first production period T1 in the privilege production SP1 and the start of the second privilege production SP2. At least a part of the production of the part is the same production, the privilege production SP1 and the second privilege production SP2 are productions having different modes from the middle, and the second privilege production SP2 is the operation of the second operation means. This is an effect in which the privilege is notified based on the operation of the second operating means after the request display RP is displayed on the display means, and the privilege given to the player by the second privilege effect SP2. The advantage of the privilege given to the player by the privilege effect SP1 may be larger than the advantage.

In this case, if the privilege effect SP1 is executed, the second privilege effect SP2 is not executed, and if the second privilege effect SP2 is executed, the privilege effect SP1 is not executed. You may.

Further, as shown by the effect pattern P4 in FIG. 47, at least one of the privilege effect SP1 and the second privilege effect SP2 is produced by the privilege effect SP1 and the second privilege effect SP2 before the privilege is notified. It may be an effect in which a notice effect PP that is expected to be our privilege effect SP1 may be executed.

<Embodiment 3 / Specific example of production>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 54, a specific example of the effect that the slot machine according to the third embodiment can execute will be described.

<Embodiment 3 / 1G Complete Freeze (Bonus Production)>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of the 1G complete freeze according to the third embodiment in chronological order. Here, the 1G complete freeze is a production (complete production) performed in one game, and is a production accompanied by a freeze (privilege production).

The state shown in FIG. 48 (1) is a state in which the N (N is a positive integer) th game is performed in the AT state. In this Nth game, since the stop operation is performed according to the operation navigation in the AT state, a predetermined number of medals are paid out and the AT screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157.

In the display of the AT screen of this example, a display indicating the total number of medals acquired in the AT state (in this example, a character string such as "106GET" indicating that the number is 106) and the remaining games in the AT state are displayed. A display indicating the number (in this example, a character string such as "remaining 49G" indicating that the number of remaining games is 49G) and a display indicating that a predetermined number of medals have been paid out in the game (in this example). In this example, the characters such as "Stunning !!" are displayed).

<Embodiment 3 / 1G Complete Freeze (Bonus Production) / First Production Period>
In the following state shown in FIG. 48 (2), the N + 1th game is started based on the operation of the first operating means (start lever 135 in this example), and the chance combination (strong cherry in this example). Since the game was internally won, a lottery for the number of AT addition games and a production lottery were executed, a 100G AT addition game was given, and the production of the winning 1G complete freeze was started.

Specifically, when the main control unit 300 determines the number of AT addition games in the lottery for the number of AT addition games in the lottery process such as winning combination, if the chance combination is a strong cherry, the random number value is 0 to 63. Sometimes 10G is selected, 30G is selected when the random number is 64 to 95, 50G is selected when the random number is 96 to 111, and 100G is selected when the random number is 112 to 127. In this example, 100G is selected by lottery (100G is won).

Further, when the main control unit 300 determines the production content in the production lottery of the winning combination or the like lottery process, when the number of AT additional games is 100G, the main control unit 300 selects 1G complete freeze when the random number value is 0 to 8. Then, when the random value is 9 to 15, the freeze after 2G is selected, and when the random value is 16 to 127, the freeze after 3G is selected. In this example, the 1G complete freeze is selected by lottery (1G complete freeze). The first sub-control unit 400 has started the privilege production corresponding to the 1G complete freeze. The privilege production according to this example is a duel production in which the character of the lord and the character of the samurai fight a duel, and in the first production period T1 of the privilege production, an animation including a duel start scene and a duel scene is displayed.

Further, in the internal lottery process, the main control unit 300 refers to the lottery result of the lottery process such as the winning combination, determines whether or not the game is a production that freezes, and if applicable, sets a freeze flag. The freeze timing data is set while turning it on. However, in this example, since the 1G complete freeze is an effect of freezing in the game, the freeze flag is turned ON and the freeze timing data (in this example, the stop button) is set. The third stop of 137 to 139) is set.

The following state shown in FIG. 48 (3) is based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and the second operating means (in this example, the chance button 136). ) Is in the state where the button effect including the operation request display is started. In the operation request display of this example, a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, a button image BI that imitates the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string such as "press" are displayed). ing.

The state shown in FIG. 48 (4) that follows is a state in which the operation of the second operating means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted. Since the first effect period T1 is a period during which the effect cannot proceed based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example), the chance button 136 is pressed according to the operation request display. However, the pressing operation does not affect the ongoing privilege production, and no new production has been started. In addition, the operation request display is continuously displayed.

<Embodiment 3 / 1G Complete Freeze (Bonus Production) / Second Production Period>
The following state shown in FIG. 48 (5) is a state in which the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139) is accepted in the N + 1th game. Since the first effect period T1 is a period during which the game can proceed based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139) (game progress valid period). , The winning determination is made based on the acceptance of the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the second production period T2 of the privilege production is started.

This second effect period T2 is a period including a period (freeze period in which the game is in a frozen state) T5 in which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operating means, and in this example, 10 seconds. Freeze. Further, in the privilege production, the privilege notification effect (privilege notification effect) is executed after the start of the second production period T2.

In the second production period T2 of the privilege production of this example, after performing a freeze production (in this example, a character string such as "CHANGE !! Is it a chance?" Is displayed on the black background image) during the freeze period, it is strong. Includes a display indicating that a predetermined number of medals have been paid out after winning a cherry (in this example, a character string such as "8GET! Yes") and a battle victory scene in which the character of the palace defeats the character of the samurai. The animation is displayed, and finally, a privilege notification effect (in this example, a character string such as "+ 100G" is displayed) is performed to announce the number of AT additional games (privileges) given in the game.

<Game after the 3 / 1G complete freeze (privilege production)>
The following state shown in FIG. 48 (6) is a state in which the N + second game is started in the AT state based on the acceptance of the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the closing button 130). In this N + 2nd game, the effect image display device 157 is used to display an AT screen including information on the number of AT additional games given in the previous N + 1th game.

In the display of the AT screen of this example, a display indicating the total number of medals acquired in the AT state (in this example, a character string such as "114GET" indicating that the number is 114) and the remaining games in the AT state are displayed. A display indicating the number (in this example, a character string such as "remaining 149G" indicating that the number of remaining games is 149G) and a display indicating that a predetermined number of medals have been paid out in the previous game. (In this example, the characters such as "Stunning !!" are displayed).

According to the privilege effect according to this example, the period during which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, the start lever 135, and the stop buttons 137 to 139). (Freeze period) Before the second production period T2 including at least T5, the first production period T1 in which it is impossible to proceed with the production based on the operation of the second operating means (chance button 136 in this example). By providing the above, it is possible to give the player the impression that the freeze period is long without setting the freeze period long, and it may be possible to provide an unexpected game.

<Embodiment 3 / 1G completion button (non-privilege production)>
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of the 1G completion button according to the third embodiment in chronological order. Here, the 1G completion button is a production performed in one game (completion production) and is a production without freeze (non-privilege production). Regarding the same effect as the 1G complete freeze (privilege effect) described with reference to FIG. 48, the description thereof will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate explanations.

The state shown in FIG. 49 (1) is a state in which the N (N is a positive integer) th game is performed in the AT state, and is the same state as described with reference to FIG. 48 (1).

In the following state shown in FIG. 49 (2), the N + 1th game is started based on the operation of the first operating means (start lever 135 in this example), and the chance combination (weak cherry in this example). Since the game was internally won, the AT addition game number lottery and the production lottery were executed, the 10G AT addition game was given, and the production of the winning 1G completion button was started.

Specifically, when the main control unit 300 determines the number of AT addition games in the lottery for the number of AT addition games in the lottery process such as winning combination, if the chance combination is a weak cherry, the random number value is 0 to 63. When 0G is selected, 10G is selected when the random number value is 64 to 120, 30G is selected when the random number value is 121 to 125, 50G is selected when the random number value is 126, and the random number value is 100G is selected at 127, but in this example, 10G is selected by lottery (winning 10G).

Further, the main control unit 300 selects the 1G completion button when the random number value is 0 to 124 when the number of AT additional games is 10G when determining the production content in the production lottery of the winning combination or the like lottery process. Then, when the random number value is 125-126, the 2G interlocking button is selected, and when the random number value is 127, the 3G interlocking button is selected. ), And the first sub-control unit 400 has started the production corresponding to the 1G completion button. The effect corresponding to the 1G completion button according to this example is a duel effect in which the character of the lord and the character of the samurai fight a duel, and is an effect of the same aspect as the privilege effect corresponding to the 1G completion freeze.

Further, in the internal lottery process, the main control unit 300 refers to the lottery result of the lottery process such as the winning combination, determines whether or not the game is a production that freezes, and if applicable, sets a freeze flag. The freeze timing data is set while turning it ON, but in this example, since the 1G completion button is an effect that does not freeze in the game, the internal lottery process is completed without turning the freeze flag ON. That is, the period during which the effect corresponding to the 1G completion button is performed does not include the period during which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operating means (freezing period in the frozen state). ..

The period during which the production corresponding to the 1G completion button is performed may be a period including the freeze period as a part, for example, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific chance role is internally won) or , When performing a specific effect), freeze may be executed during a part of the period in which the effect corresponding to the 1G completion button is performed. Further, when there is a freeze state consisting of the first time and a freeze state consisting of the second time longer than the first time, the freeze state consisting of the second time is changed to the freeze state consisting of the first time. It may be executed with priority over, and conversely, the freeze state consisting of the first time may be executed with priority over the freeze state consisting of the second time.

The following state shown in FIG. 49 (3) is based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and the second operating means (in this example, the chance button). It is a state in which the button effect including the operation request display of 136) has been started. In the operation request display of this example, a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, a button image BI that imitates the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string such as "press" are displayed). ing.

Instead of (or in addition to) the button effect shown in FIG. 49 (3), the button effect (freeze chance up) shown in FIG. 49 (3') may be applied. This button effect (freeze chance up) is similar to the button effect shown in FIG. 49 (3) in that it includes an operation request display of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example). In the operation request display of the button effect (freeze chance up), a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, a button image BI that imitates the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character such as "press" are displayed. Display columns). Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed according to the operation request display, the freeze is executed in a part of the period in which the effect corresponding to the 1G completion button is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give unexpectedness to the production, and it may be possible to increase the player's motivation to play. Also, when a freeze chance up appears, either operate the chance button in the expectation that the button effect will not progress, or expect the freeze to occur by performing the next stop operation, or ask the player the next You can create fun that lets you choose an operation.

The state shown in FIG. 49 (4) that follows is a state in which the operation of the second operating means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted. Since the production period of the 1G completion button is a period in which the production can proceed based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example), in this example, the chance button is according to the operation request display. Since the pressing operation of 136 was performed, as the operation response display corresponding to the operation, the display of the battle victory scene in which the character of the lord wins the character of the samurai and the number of AT additional games given in the game (privilege) ) Is added (in this example, a character string such as "+ 10G" is displayed).

The following states shown in FIGS. 49 (5) and 49 (6) are based on the acceptance of the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and the effect image display device. 157 is used to display an AT screen including information on the number of AT additional games given in the game.

In the display of the AT screen of this example, a display indicating the total number of medals acquired in the AT state (in this example, a character string such as "114GET" indicating that the number is 114) and the remaining games in the AT state are displayed. A display indicating the number (in this example, a character string such as "remaining 59G" indicating that the number of remaining games is 59G) and a display indicating that a predetermined number of medals have been paid out in the previous game. (In this example, the characters such as "Stunning !!" are displayed).

<Frozen after 3 / 3G (privilege production)>
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of post-3G freeze according to the third embodiment in chronological order. Here, the post-3G freeze is a production (interlocking production) performed over a plurality of games (2G), a production with a 2G precursor effect (precursor effect), and a production accompanied by a freeze (privilege production). ). Regarding the same effect as the 1G complete freeze (privilege effect) described with reference to FIG. 48, the description thereof will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate explanations.

The state shown in FIG. 50 (1) is a state in which the N (N is a positive integer) th game is performed in the AT state. In this Nth game, since the stop operation is performed according to the operation navigation in the AT state, a predetermined number of medals are paid out and the AT screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157.

<Implementation 3 / Freeze after 3G (privilege production) / First production period>
In the following state shown in FIG. 50 (2), the N + 1th game is started based on the operation of the first operating means (start lever 135 in this example), and the chance combination (strong cherry in this example). Since the game was internally won, the AT addition game number lottery and the production lottery were executed, the AT addition game of 100G was given, and the production of the freeze after the winning 3G was started.

Specifically, when the main control unit 300 determines the number of AT addition games in the lottery for the number of AT addition games in the lottery process such as winning combination, if the chance combination is a strong cherry, the random number value is 0 to 63. Sometimes 10G is selected, 30G is selected when the random number is 64 to 95, 50G is selected when the random number is 96 to 111, and 100G is selected when the random number is 112 to 127. In this example, 100G is selected by lottery (100G is won).

Further, when the main control unit 300 determines the production content in the production lottery of the winning combination or the like lottery process, when the number of AT additional games is 100G, the main control unit 300 selects 1G complete freeze when the random number value is 0 to 8. Then, when the random value is 9 to 15, the freeze after 2G is selected, and when the random value is 16 to 127, the freeze after 3G is selected. In this example, the freeze after 3G is selected by lottery (freeze after 3G). (Winning), and has started a privilege production corresponding to the freeze after 3G. The privilege production according to this example is a race production in which the character of the palace and the character of the grandfather race, and in the first production period T1 of the privilege production, the race scene is included after the precursory production is performed over 3G. The animation is displayed.

Further, in the internal lottery process, the main control unit 300 refers to the lottery result of the lottery process such as the winning combination, determines whether or not the game is a production that freezes, and if applicable, sets a freeze flag. Although the freeze timing data is set while turning it on, in this example, the freeze flag is not turned on in the game because the freeze after 3G is not an effect of freezing at the 1st G.

On the other hand, in the internal lottery process, when the effect content determined in the lottery process such as winning combination is 2G post-freeze (or 3G post-freeze), the main control unit 300 has the number of games that are precursors to freeze (number of precursor games 1). Is set to 1G (or 2G), but in this example, since it freezes after 3G, the number of games that are precursors to freeze (the number of precursor games is 1) is set to 2G. As a result, a freeze precursor is performed in a total of 3G including the game of freezing.

The states shown in FIGS. 50 (2) to 50 (3) are states in which a freeze sign is being performed. In the freeze precursor of this example, the 1G precursor (precursor 1G) is performed in the N + 1th game, and the 2G precursor (precursor 2G) is performed in the subsequent N + 2nd game. The mode of the freeze precursor is not particularly limited, but in this example, as the precursor of the 1G (precursor 1G), the production including the scene in which the character of the grandfather appears is performed, and as the precursor of the 2G (precursor 2G), the grandfather The production includes a scene in which the character of the lord begins to chase after the character of.

In the following state shown in FIG. 50 (4), in the N + 3rd game, the 3G precursor (precursor 3G) is performed and the first operating means is operated (in this example, the start lever 135 is pressed). Is in the accepted state.

In the internal lottery process, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the value of the precursor game 1 after the update is 0, and if it is 0, the precursor game 1 is finished in the game and freezes from the next game. In order to start the game, the freeze flag is turned on and the freeze timing data is set. However, in this example, since the precursory effect ends in the N + 3rd game, the freeze flag is turned on and the freeze timing data (book). In the example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (third stop) are set.

The following state shown in FIG. 50 (5) is based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the first stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and the second operating means (in this example, the chance button). It is a state in which the button effect including the operation request display of 136) has been started. In the operation request display of this example, a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, a button image BI that imitates the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string such as "press" are displayed). ing.

The following state shown in FIG. 50 (6) is a state in which the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted. Since the first effect period T1 is a period during which the effect cannot proceed based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example), the chance button 136 is pressed according to the operation request display. However, the pressing operation does not affect the ongoing privilege production, and no new production has been started.

The following state shown in FIG. 50 (7) is based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and the second operating means (in this example, the chance button 136). ) Is in the state where the button effect including the operation request display is started. In the operation request display of this example, a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, a button image BI that imitates the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string such as "press" are displayed). ing. Further, in this example, the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139) is accepted while the operation request display is displayed, but the operation is performed without erasing the operation request display. The request display is being displayed.

The following state shown in FIG. 50 (8) is a state in which the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted. Since the first effect period T1 is a period during which the effect cannot proceed based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example), the chance button 136 is pressed according to the operation request display. However, the pressing operation does not affect the ongoing privilege production, and no new production has been started.

It should be noted that the longer the freeze precursor, the larger the number of additional games, and so on, the privilege and the length of the freeze may be related. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the privilege production in progress does not proceed by operating the chance button.

<Implementation 3 / Freeze after 3G (privilege production) / Second production period>
The following state shown in FIG. 50 (9) is a state in which the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139) is accepted in the N + 3rd game. Since the first effect period T1 is a period during which the game can proceed based on the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139) (game progress valid period). , The winning determination is made based on the acceptance of the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the second production period T2 of the privilege production is started.

This second effect period T2 is a period including a period (freeze period in which the game is in a frozen state) T5 in which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operating means, and in this example, 10 seconds. Freeze. Further, in the privilege production, the privilege notification effect (privilege notification effect) is executed after the start of the second production period T2.

In the second production period T2 of the privilege production of this example, after performing the freeze production (in this example, displaying a character string such as "Escape or collapsing !!") during the freeze period, the second operation means (this example). Then, after performing the button effect including the operation request display of the chance button 136), the chance button 136 was pressed according to the operation request display at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (11). As the operation response display to be performed, the display of the race victory scene in which the character of the lord wins the character of the grandfather and the privilege notification effect (in this example, "+ 100G") for notifying the number of AT additional games (privileges) given in the game. Additional notification including the display of character strings such as) is performed.

<Game after freeze (privilege production) after 3 / 3G of embodiment>
The following state shown in FIG. 50 (12) is a state in which the N + 4th game is started in the AT state based on the acceptance of the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the closing button 130). In this N + 4th game, the effect image display device 157 is used to display an AT screen including information on the number of AT additional games given in the previous N + 3rd game.

According to the privilege effect according to this example, the period during which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, the start lever 135, and the stop buttons 137 to 139). (Freeze period) Before the second production period T2 including at least T5, the first production period T1 in which it is impossible to proceed with the production based on the operation of the second operating means (chance button 136 in this example). By providing the above, it is possible to give the player the impression that the freeze period is long without setting the freeze period long, and it may be possible to provide an unexpected game.

<Embodiment 3 / 3G interlocking button (non-privilege production)>
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of the 3G interlocking button according to the third embodiment in chronological order. Here, the 3G interlocking button is an effect (interlocking effect) performed over a plurality of games (2G), is an effect with a 2G precursor effect (precursor effect), and is an effect without freeze (non-freeze). Bonus production). Regarding the same effect as the 3G post-freeze (privilege effect) described with reference to FIG. 50, the description thereof will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate explanations.

The state shown in FIG. 51 (1) is a state in which the N (N is a positive integer) th game is performed in the AT state, and is the same state as described with reference to FIG. 50 (1).

In the following state shown in FIG. 51 (2), the N + 1th game is started based on the operation of the first operating means (start lever 135 in this example), and the chance combination (weak cherry in this example). Since the game was internally won, the AT addition game number lottery and the production lottery were executed, the 10G AT addition game was given, and the production of the winning 3G interlocking button was started.

Specifically, when the main control unit 300 determines the number of AT addition games in the lottery for the number of AT addition games in the lottery process such as winning combination, if the chance combination is a weak cherry, the random number value is 0 to 63. When 0G is selected, 10G is selected when the random number value is 64 to 120, 30G is selected when the random number value is 121 to 125, 50G is selected when the random number value is 126, and the random number value is 100G is selected at 127, but in this example, 10G is selected by lottery (winning 10G).

Further, when the main control unit 300 determines the production content in the production lottery of the winning combination or the like lottery process, when the number of AT additional games is 10G, the main control unit 300 selects the 1G completion button when the random number value is 0 to 124. Then, when the random number value is 125-126, the 2G interlocking button is selected, and when the random number value is 127, the 3G interlocking button is selected. In this example, the 3G interlocking button is selected by lottery (winning the 3G interlocking button). ), And the production corresponding to the 3G interlocking button has started. The effect corresponding to the 3G interlocking button according to this example is a race effect in which the character of the palace and the character of the grandfather race, and is an effect of the same mode as the privilege effect corresponding to the freeze after 3G.

Further, in the internal lottery process, the main control unit 300 refers to the lottery result of the lottery process such as the winning combination, determines whether or not the game is a production that freezes, and if applicable, sets a freeze flag. The freeze timing data is set while turning it ON, but in this example, since the 3G interlocking button is an effect that does not freeze in the game, the internal lottery process is completed without turning the freeze flag ON. That is, the period during which the effect corresponding to the 3G interlocking button is performed does not include the period during which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operating means (freeze period in the frozen state). ..

The period during which the production corresponding to the 3G interlocking button is performed may be a period including the freeze period as a part, for example, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific chance role is internally won). , When performing a specific effect), freeze may be executed during a part of the period in which the effect corresponding to the 3G interlocking button is performed. Further, when there is a freeze state consisting of the first time and a freeze state consisting of the second time longer than the first time, the freeze state consisting of the second time is changed to the freeze state consisting of the first time. It may be executed with priority over, and conversely, the freeze state consisting of the first time may be executed with priority over the freeze state consisting of the second time.

The state shown in FIG. 51 (5) is based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the first stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and the second operating means (in this example, the chance button 136). ) Is in the state where the button effect including the operation request display is started. In the operation request display of this example, a display prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, a button image BI that imitates the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string such as "press" are displayed). ing.

The following state shown in FIG. 51 (6) is a state in which the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139) is accepted. Further, in this example, the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139) is accepted while the operation request display is displayed, but the operation request display is not erased. The operation request display is being displayed continuously.

The following state shown in FIG. 51 (7) is a state in which the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted. In the production period of the 3G interlocking button, the production can proceed based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example). Therefore, in this example, FIG. 51 (7) shows. Since the chance button 136 was pressed according to the operation request display at the indicated timing, the display of the race victory scene in which the character of the lord wins the character of the grandfather and the game concerned are displayed as the operation response display corresponding to the operation. An additional notification (in this example, a character string such as "+ 10G" is displayed) is performed to announce the number of AT additional games (privileges) given in.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 51 (8), the effect image display device 157 is used based on the acceptance of the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139). This is a state in which the AT screen including the information on the number of AT additional games given in the game is displayed.

According to the effect according to this example, since the privilege is generated by the operation of the chance button, the player who wants to know the content of the privilege can positively operate the chance button. That is, a freeze may occur from an effect having the same appearance halfway, and in this case as well, the chance button can be operated. In addition, it becomes possible to grasp that the chance button is not a failure.

<Modification 1 of Embodiment 3 / 1G complete freeze (privilege production)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the 1G complete freeze (privilege effect) described with reference to FIG. 48 in chronological order. The same production as the 1G complete freeze (privilege production) will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate explanations.

The state shown in FIG. 52 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 48 (1), and is a state in which the N (N is a positive integer) th game is performed in the AT state.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (2) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 48 (2), and the N + 1th game is started based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the start lever 135). At the same time, since he was internally elected as a chance role (strong cherry in this example), a lottery for the number of AT additional games and a production lottery were executed, a 100G AT additional game was given, and the winning 1G complete freeze was produced. It is in the started state.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 52 (3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 48 (3), and is based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139). The button effect including the operation request display of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example) has been started, but in this example, the chance button 136 is not pressed according to the operation request display. , The operation request display is continuously displayed.

The following state shown in 52 (4) is almost the same as the state shown in FIG. 48 (4), and the operation of the first operating means in the N + 1th game (in this example, the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139). The operation) has been accepted, but the mode and execution timing of the privilege notification effect are different.

Specifically, in the privilege production of this example, after the privilege notification production 1 is executed in the second production period T2 (N + 1th game), the third production period T3 (N + 2) following the second production period T2. In the second game), the privilege notification effect 2 is executed. Further, in the privilege notification effect 1 of this example, an animation including a battle victory scene in which the character of the palace wins over the character of the samurai is displayed, and in the privilege notification effect 2, the number of AT additional games given in the game (privilege). ), A display showing the total number of medals won in the AT state (in this example, a character string such as "114GET" indicating that the number is 114), and the number of games remaining in the AT state. (In this example, a character string such as "remaining 149G" indicating that the number of remaining games is 149G) is displayed.

The image (character image of Sabohani, etc.) displayed in the privilege notification effect 2 shown in FIG. 52 (5) is a special image different from the image displayed on the AT screen shown in FIG. 48 (6). , The same image may be used. Further, as a special image when a freeze occurs, the image displayed in the privilege notification effect 2 shown in FIG. 52 (5) may be configured to be displayed only when the freeze occurs.

<Modification 2 of Embodiment 3 / 1G complete freeze (privilege production)>
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the 1G complete freeze (privilege effect) described with reference to FIG. 48 in chronological order. The same production as the 1G complete freeze (privilege production) will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate explanations.

The following state shown in FIG. 53 (2) is almost the same as the state shown in FIG. 48 (2), and the N + 1th game is started based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the start lever 135). At the same time, since he was internally elected as a chance role (strong cherry in this example), a lottery for the number of AT additional games and a production lottery were executed, a 100G AT additional game was given, and the winning 1G complete freeze was produced. Is in the started state.

The privilege production related to this example is a duel production in which the character of the lord and the character of the samurai fight a duel, and in the first production period T1 of the privilege production, an animation including a duel start scene and a duel scene is displayed. Then, it is the same as the 1G complete freeze (privilege production) described with reference to FIG. 48. However, in this example, since the button effect is changed in two stages (chance-up effect) in the first effect period T1, the display mode of the duel start scene (samurai character) shown in FIG. 53 (2) is performed. Appearance) is different from the display mode (the character of the lord appears) of the duel start scene shown in FIG. 48 (2).

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 53 (3) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 48 (3), and is based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139). It is a state in which the button effect including the operation request display of the second operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) has been started.

The state shown in FIG. 53 (4) that follows is a state in which the operation of the second operating means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted. Since the first effect period T1 is a period during which the effect cannot proceed based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example), the chance button 136 is pressed according to the operation request display. However, the pressing operation does not affect the ongoing privilege production, and no new production has been started.

Further, in this example, based on the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the chance button 136), the operation request display included in the button effect is changed to the first operation request display (in this example, the chance button 136). From the display of the button image BI1 that imitates the appearance and the display of the character string such as "press"), the display of the second operation request (in this example, the display of the button image BI2 that imitates the appearance of the effect operation means (not shown). It has been changed to display a character string such as "close").

The following state shown in FIG. 53 (5) is a state in which the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the effect operating means (not shown) is accepted). Since the first effect period T1 is a period in which it is impossible to proceed with the effect based on the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the effect operation means (not shown)), the effect operation (not shown) is performed according to the operation request display. Although the means is being operated, the ongoing privilege production is not affected by the operation, and no new production has been started. In addition, the operation request display is continuously displayed.

The following state shown in FIG. 53 (6) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 48 (5), and the operation of the first operating means in the N + 1th game (in this example, the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139). ) Has been accepted. Further, the subsequent state shown in FIG. 53 (7) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 48 (6), and the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the pressing operation of the input button 130) is accepted. Based on this, it is a state in which the N + second game is started in the AT state.

<Modification example of embodiment 3 / 1G completion button (non-privilege production)>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a modified example of the 1G completion button (non-privilege effect) described with reference to FIG. 49 in chronological order. Regarding the same production as the 1G completion button (non-privilege production), the explanation will be omitted in order to avoid duplicate explanations.

The state shown in FIG. 54 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 49 (1), and is a state in which the N (N is a positive integer) th game is performed in the AT state.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 54 (2) is almost the same as the state shown in FIG. 49 (2), and the N + 1th game is started based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the start lever 135). At the same time, since he was internally elected as a chance role (watermelon in this example), a lottery for the number of AT addition games and a production lottery were executed, a 50G AT addition game was given, and the winning 1G completion button was produced. It is in the started state.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 54 (3) is almost the same as the state shown in FIG. 49 (3), and is based on the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139). , It is a state in which the button effect including the operation request display of the second operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) has been started.

The state shown in FIG. 54 (4) that follows is a state in which the first operation of the second operating means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted. In the first production period T1, the production can proceed based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example), but here, the second operation means (chance in this example). The button effect including the operation request display of the second operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is continued without displaying the operation response to the operation of the button 136).

In addition, when the freeze is accompanied, as shown in FIG. 54 (4'), even when the operation of the second operating means is performed, another other component of the effect while continuing the button effect. It may be configured to change the image. With such a configuration, the player's expectation may be increased.

The following state shown in FIG. 54 (5) is a state in which the second operation of the second operating means (chance button 136 in this example) is accepted. Since the production period of the 1G completion button is a period in which the production can proceed based on the operation of the second operation means (chance button 136 in this example), in this example, the chance button is according to the operation request display. Since the pressing operation of 136 was performed, as the operation response display, the display of the battle victory scene in which the character of the lord wins the character of the samurai and the addition of notifying the number of AT additional games (privileges) given in the game are added. Notification (display of a character string such as "+ 50G" in this example) is performed.

The following states shown in FIGS. 54 (6) and 54 (7) are almost the same as the states shown in FIGS. 49 (5) and 49 (6), and the first operating means (in this example, the stop buttons 137 to 139). 3 Stop) Based on the acceptance of the operation, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT screen including the information on the number of AT additional games given in the game.

<Embodiment 3 / Invention 3-1 of the present application>
As described above, the game console according to the present invention 3-1 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of types of operating means provided at positions that can be operated by the player, and a plurality of types of symbols. (For example, the symbol shown in FIG. 3) is applied and rotationally driven (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) and the effect means capable of executing the privilege effect (for example, the effect image display shown in FIG. 1). A game table including a device 157, a shutter (shielding device) 163, a speaker, etc.), the game table is a slot machine, and one type of operating means among the plurality of types of operating means is , The first operating means, one of the plurality of types of operating means is the second operating means, and the first operating means is a bet for executing the loading of the game medium. A button (for example, the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 shown in FIG. 1), a lever for starting the rotation of the reel (for example, the start lever 135 shown in FIG. 1), and a stop button for individually stopping each reel (for example, FIG. 1). The second operation means is a means including an effect operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1), and the privilege effect is at least the first. (For example, the first production period T1 shown in FIGS. 46 to 48 and the like) and the second production period following the first production period (for example, the second production shown in FIGS. 46 to 48 and the like). It is a series of effects including the period T2), and the privilege effect includes a privilege display including an operation request display of the second operation means (for example, an operation request display shown in FIGS. 46 to 48 and the like). It is an effect composed of an expected effect (hereinafter referred to as "expected effect") and an effect of notifying the result of the privilege (hereinafter referred to as "result effect"), and the first effect period is the first effect. It is a period during which the game can proceed based on the operation of the operation means, and the first effect period is a period during which the operation request display is executed, based on the operation of the second operation means. The expected effect is executed in at least a part of the period including the end of the first effect period, and the second effect period is the period of the first operation means. A period that includes at least a period during which the game cannot proceed based on the operation, and after the start of the period during which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operating means in the second effect period. The result effect (for example, the privilege notification effect shown in FIGS. 46 to 48) is started at the above. It is a game table characterized by that.

According to the game console according to the invention 3-1 of the present application, the second production period includes at least a period (freeze period) in which the game cannot proceed based on the operation of the first operating means. By providing the first production period in which the production cannot proceed based on the operation of the operating means, it is possible to give the player the impression that the freeze period was long without lengthening the freeze period, which is surprising. It may be possible to provide a certain game.

Further, the effect means includes a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 48), and the first effect period is after the operation request display is displayed on the display means. The period during which the effect including the effect of continuously displaying the operation request display is executed even when the second operation means is operated (for example, the effect patterns P1 and P2 shown in FIG. 47). It may be one production period T1).

With such a configuration, in the first production period, the operation request display is displayed and there is no reaction even if the button is pressed, so that it is possible to give an illusion as if a freeze has occurred. In the second production period, it is possible to make an illusion. Since the freeze actually occurs, it may be possible to show the privilege production without discouraging the player.

Further, in addition to a certain operation using the first operating means (for example, operation B shown in FIG. 47 (third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), the medal insertion buttons 130 to shown in FIG. 1). The first effect period may end and the second effect period may start in response to the execution of 132) or the start lever 135).

With such a configuration, in the first production period, there is a sense of discomfort that the production buttons do not respond, but in the second production period, a freeze occurs as the game progresses, which surprises the player. May be possible.

Further, the operation request display is continuously displayed from the start of the display of the operation request display to the end of the first effect period, and the first operation is displayed during the period in which the operation request display is displayed. The game progresses based on an operation different from the certain operation using the means (for example, the operation E shown in FIG. 47 (the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139)), and the operation request display continues. It may be displayed.

With such a configuration, in the first production period, the discomfort caused by the production buttons is prolonged by straddling the operations of a plurality of stop buttons, and then the freeze production is started in the second production period. In some cases, it can surprise the player. Further, in the conventional game console, when the effect button is not operated, the effect corresponding to the operation (corresponding to the operation response display) is automatically (automatically) executed by the operation of the next stop button or the like. However, since the operation response display is continuously displayed, it is possible to show a freeze in the production during the first production period. In addition, since the real freeze effect is executed in the second effect period after that, the player does not feel distrust.

Further, the effect means is a means capable of executing the second privilege effect (for example, the effect shown by the effect pattern P3 in FIG. 47), and the privilege effect and the second privilege effect are partially different from each other. When the privilege effect is executed, the second privilege effect is not executed, and when the second privilege effect is executed, the privilege effect is not executed and the second privilege effect is executed. The period during which the effect is executed is a period including a period during which the game can proceed based on the operation of the first operating means, and is a part including the start of the first effect period in the privilege effect. At least a part of the production including the production and the start of the second privilege production is the same production, and the privilege production and the second privilege production are different in mode from the middle, and the first The second privilege effect is an effect composed of the expected effect and the result effect, and the second operation means is displayed after the operation request display of the second operation means is displayed on the display means. Based on the operation, the operation request display disappears and the result effect (for example, the second privilege notification effect SP2 shown by the effect pattern P3 in FIG. 47) is started, and the second privilege effect is started. The advantage of the privilege given to the player by the privilege effect may be larger than the advantage of the privilege given to the player by the above-mentioned privilege effect.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to expect the grant of the privilege even if it is the second privilege production while expecting the freeze. In addition, it may be possible to expect a freeze in which the notification is delayed by changing the timing of the privilege notification.

The start time of the first effect period and the start time of the second effect period may be the same. In addition, the second privilege effect is an effect in which the privilege is not given after the effect in which the privilege is notified based on the operation of the second operation means (a fake (gase) effect). There may be.

Further, at least one of the privilege effect and the second privilege effect is the privilege effect of the privilege effect and the second privilege effect before the result effect is started. It may be an effect in which the expected advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect PP shown by the effect pattern P4 in FIG. 47) may be executed.

With such a configuration, the player's expectation may be raised by the advance notice effect.

The configuration of the gaming table according to the invention 3-1 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 54. Therefore, for example, the privilege production is not limited to the AT addition production, for example, winning a bonus (privilege production: big bonus, second privilege production: regular bonus) and notification of the game status (privilege production: AT specialization). Zone, second bonus production: CZ such as AT lottery high probability zone) may be used.

Further, the privilege production may be executed including the second production period (after the freeze period ends), and it is sufficient that there is at least a portion corresponding to the first production period. Further, the frozen state is not limited to the case where the operations of all the first operating means are invalidated, and only some of the first operating means are invalidated (or intermittently invalidated). For example, the second stop operation may be invalid for 5 seconds → the second stop operation is valid → the third stop operation is valid → the on button operation is invalid, etc.).

Further, after the operation request display is started by the second stop operation, the operation of the first operation means may be invalidated by the operation request display such as the third stop operation being invalidated (freeze). .. Further, in addition to the continuation of the operation request display, an effect such that the display area of the display means is blacked out or the display is frozen (frozen) may be continued for the first period. , These effects may be operation response effects. Further, the reel action may be performed by the reels 110 to 112 during the freeze.

Further, when the first operating means becomes invalid in the frozen state, the light emitting mode (for example, color or light emitting pattern) of the light output means included in the first operating means may be changed (for example). For example, when the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is valid, the light is emitted in blue, and when the operation is invalid, the light is emitted in red, etc.).

Similarly, when the second operating means becomes invalid, the light emitting mode (for example, color or light emitting pattern) of the light output means included in the second operating means may be changed (for example). For example, when the operation of the chance button 136 is valid, it emits light in blue, and when it is invalid, it emits light in red, etc.). On the other hand, the second operating means may be configured so as not to change the light emitting mode (for example, color or light emitting pattern) of the light output means regardless of whether the operation is valid or invalid.

Further, in the privilege effect, the operation request display is displayed, but the display may not be the operation valid period (the operation may not be accepted). Further, in this case, in the second privilege effect, the operation request display is displayed, and the display may be the operation valid period (the operation may be accepted).

Further, the effect button may be valid for a part of the first effect period and may be invalid for a part of the other period. Further, the first effect period may not be started by the operation of the first operating means related to the progress of the game, but may be started by an opportunity not related to the progress of the game. Further, although freeze does not occur in the production of the Gase pattern, a freeze-like production may be executed. Further, the display in which the operation request display disappears by the button operation may be included in the "game progress impossible" of the present invention.

<< Embodiment 4 >>
Next, the game console (slot machine) according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 64. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, only the configurations different from those of the slot machines 100 according to the first to third embodiments will be described below.

<Embodiment 4 / Lottery table>
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for executing the effect according to the fourth embodiment. In this example, an example in which the same lottery table is used in settings 1 to 6 will be described, but at least one lottery table having different winning probabilities may be prepared for each set value.

<Embodiment 4 / Lottery table / AT addition game number determination table when winning a chance role>
The table for determining the number of AT additional games at the time of winning the chance combination shown in FIG. 55 (a) is a lottery table referred to by the main control unit 300 when performing the “lottery for the number of AT additional games” at the time of winning the chance combination. , Lottery data is stored corresponding to each of a plurality of types of chance roles. Here, the "AT additional game number lottery" is a lottery for determining the number of AT games to be added (added) when the gaming state is the AT state.

In this example, when the main control unit 300 wins a chance combination (specific winning combination) in the AT state, the main control unit 300 determines the number of AT addition games by referring to the AT addition game number determination table at the time of winning the chance combination. .. For example, when the chance role is watermelon, 0G is selected when the random number value is 0 to 95, 10G is selected when the random number value is 96 to 111, and 30G is selected when the random number value is 112 to 120. Select, 50G is selected when the random number value is 121 to 126, and 100G is selected when the random number value is 127.

The number of AT additional games corresponding to other chance roles is as shown in the figure, but when the chance role is a strong cherry, the number of AT additional games is 10 G or more (0G is not selected). In addition, since 100G is selected when the random number value is 112 to 127, the strong cherry is the most advantageous winning combination in terms of the number of AT-added games among the chance roles.

<Embodiment 4 / Lottery table / Chance role winning production decision table>
The production determination table at the time of winning the chance combination shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c) is a lottery table referred to by the first sub-control unit 400 when performing the “production lottery” at the time of winning the chance combination. , A table is prepared corresponding to each of the number of AT added games at the time of winning the chance combination, and lottery data is stored in each table. Here, the "production lottery" is a lottery for determining the content of the production to be executed.

In addition, there are three types of production decision tables at the time of winning the chance combination in this example, the production determination tables A to C at the time of winning the chance combination (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "production determination tables A to C"). The effect determination table A is a table to be referred to in the game during the interlocking effect execution, the effect determination table B is a table to be referred to in the game during the non-interlocking effect execution, and the effect determination table C is the effect determination table. This is a table to be referred to when the effect pattern A determined by using A is corrected (changed) to the effect pattern C.

<Embodiment 4 / Lottery table / Production decision table A>
In this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 wins the chance combination (specific winning combination) during the execution of the interlocking effect in the AT state, the effect determination table A shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c) is displayed. With reference to this, the content of the effect to be executed is determined based on the number of AT additional games determined by the main control unit 300. Note that FIG. 55 illustrates only the effect determination table A corresponding to the number of additional games 0G and 10G.

For example, when the number of AT-added games is 0G, the effect pattern A01 (operation of the start lever 135) is referred to when the random value is 0 to 15 with reference to the effect determination table A0 at the time of winning the chance combination shown in FIG. 55 (b). Occasionally, display the character image of the grandfather → display the character image of the grandfather and the character string of "chance?" At the first stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and when the random number value is 16 to 31, the effect pattern Select A02 (display the character image of the grandfather at the first stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 → display the character image of the grandfather and the character string of "chance?" At the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139). When the random number value is 32 to 47, the effect pattern A03 (displays the character image of the grandfather at the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 → at the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the character image of the grandfather and "chance?" Display the character string).

Further, when the number of AT additional games is 10G, the effect pattern A11 (operation of the start lever 135) is referred to when the random value is 0 to 15 with reference to the effect determination table A1 at the time of winning the chance combination shown in FIG. 55 (c). Occasionally, the character image of the grandfather is displayed → the character image of the grandfather is continuously displayed at the first stop and the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 → the button display 1 and the button display 1 are displayed at the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139. (Display of response display 1) is selected, and when the random number values are 16 to 31, the effect pattern A12 (when the first stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the character image of the grandfather is displayed → the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139). Occasionally, the character image of the grandfather is continuously displayed → the display of the button display 1 and the response display 1 at the time of the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139) is selected, and when the random number value is 32 to 47, the effect pattern A13 ( Select the display of the character image of the grandfather at the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 → the display of the button display 1 and the response display 1 at the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

<Embodiment 4 / Lottery table / Production decision table B>
Further, in this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 wins the chance combination (specific winning combination) during the execution of the non-interlocking effect in the AT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the effect determination table B shown in FIG. 56 (a). Then, the content of the effect to be executed is determined based on the number of AT additional games determined by the main control unit 300. Note that FIG. 56 illustrates only the effect determination table B corresponding to the number of additional games of 50 G.

For example, when the number of AT-added games is 50 G, the effect pattern B51 (operation of the start lever 135) is referred to when the chance combination winning effect determination table B0 is shown in FIG. 56 (a) and the random number value is 0 to 3. Occasionally, the character image of the grandfather is displayed → the character image of the grandfather and the character string of "chance" are displayed at the first stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and when the random number value is 115, the effect pattern B61 (1G) is selected. When the start lever 135 of the eye is operated, the effect of cut-in 1 is displayed → When the stop buttons 137 to 139 are first stopped, the effect of chasing 1 is displayed → When the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped second and third , Continue the effect of chase 1 → Display the effect of cut-in 1 when operating the start lever 135 of the 2nd G → Display the effect of chase 2 when the first stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 → Stop buttons 137 to 139 At the time of the second stop, the effect of the chase 1 is continued → At the time of the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the button display 2 and the response display 2 are selected).

The effect pattern B51 of the effect determination table B is an effect pattern for 1G complete effect applied to a single effect executed in a single game, and the effect patterns B61 to B65 are a plurality of games (in this example, in this example). This is an effect pattern for an interlocking effect applied to an interlocking effect executed over 3G).

<Embodiment 4 / Lottery table / Production decision table C>
Further, in this example, when the first sub-control unit 400 corrects the effect pattern in various effect setting processes described later, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the effect determination table C shown in FIG. 56 (b) and sets the effect determination table A. The effect pattern A determined in use is corrected (changed) to the effect pattern C. Note that FIG. 56 illustrates only the effect determination table C corresponding to the number of additional games of 10 G.

For example, the effect pattern A determined by using the effect determination table A displays the character image of the grandfather when the effect pattern A11 (when the start lever 135 is operated → at the first stop and the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139. If the character image of the grandfather is continuously displayed → the button display 1 and the response display 1 are displayed at the time of the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139), this effect pattern A11 is changed to the effect pattern C11 (start lever 135). The character image of the grandfather is displayed during the operation of → The character image of the grandfather is continuously displayed at the first stop and the second stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139 → “+10” at the third stop of the stop buttons 137 to 139. "Display of character string).

In this example, in addition to the effect determination table A for determining the effect pattern A, the effect determination table C for correcting the effect pattern A is provided, but the two types of tables are composed of one type of table. You may. Further, a lottery for determining the effect pattern A may be performed when the effect pattern A is corrected.

<Embodiment 4 / Internal lottery process>
Next, the internal lottery process according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery process according to the fourth embodiment.

The internal lottery process according to the fourth embodiment is a process corresponding to the internal lottery process (step S103) described with reference to FIG. 7 (a), and the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment is the process corresponding to the internal lottery process (step S103). Instead of the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 57 (a), the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 57 (a) is executed.

In step S3001 of this internal lottery process, processing related to the lottery table of the winning combination shown in FIG. 6 and a lottery using the acquired random number value (winning combination internal lottery) and the like is performed. In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the internally won combination (internal winning combination) is a chance combination (in this example, the chance combination shown in FIG. 55 (a)), and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S3005. If not applicable, the internal lottery process ends.

In step S3005, the above-mentioned lottery for the number of AT additional games is performed, and the number of AT games to be added (added) is determined. In the next step S3007, a lottery for a game for performing a precursory effect is performed based on the number of AT additional games determined in the AT additional game number lottery in step S3005. In the next step S3009, the internal lottery process is terminated after preparing to transmit the internal lottery processing command including information on the internal winning combination, the number of AT added games, the number of precursory effect games, etc. to the first sub-control unit 400. ..

<Embodiment 4 / Production control process>
Next, the effect control process according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process according to the fourth embodiment.

The effect control process according to the fourth embodiment is a process corresponding to the effect control process described with reference to FIG. 8 (b), and the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment is the effect control shown in FIG. 8 (b). Instead of the process, the effect control process shown in FIG. 57B is executed.

In step S3101 of this effect control process, a state notification process is performed. In this state notification process, the same process as the state notification process described with reference to FIG. 9 is performed. In the next step S3103, after performing various effect setting processes, the effect control process is terminated. Although the details will be described later, in the various effect setting processes in step 3103, the above-mentioned effect lottery and settings corresponding to various effects are performed according to the effect pattern determined in the effect lottery.

<Embodiment 4 / Production control processing / Various production setting processing>
Next, various effect setting processes (step S3103) in the above-mentioned effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the flow of various effect setting processes in the effect control process according to the fourth embodiment.

In step S3201 of various effect setting processes, information (internal winning combination, number of AT additional games, number of precursor effect games, etc.) included in the internal lottery processing command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the RAM 408. In the next step S3203, it is determined whether or not there is a button reservation flag, and if there is, the process proceeds to step S3205, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3217.

In step S3205, the effect pattern A determined by the effect lottery using the effect determination tables A shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c) is set as a new effect content, and in the next step S3207, the number of precursor games is set. Subtract one. In the next step S3209, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games after the update is 0, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S3211, and if not applicable, various effect setting processes are terminated. In step S3211, the effect pattern A determines whether or not there is a button addition, and if there is, the process proceeds to step S3213, and if not, various effect setting processes are terminated.

In step S3213, the effect pattern A is corrected to the effect pattern C using the effect determination table C shown in FIG. 56 (b), the corrected effect pattern C is set as a new effect content, and in the next step 3215, the effect pattern C is set. After turning off the button reservation flag, various effect setting processes are terminated.

In step S3217, it is determined whether or not there is an addition of the AT game, and if there is an addition, the process proceeds to step S3219, and if there is no addition, various effect setting processes are terminated. In step S3219, the effect pattern B determined by the effect lottery using the effect determination table B shown in FIG. 56 (a) is set as a new effect content, and in the next step S3221, a button effect is included in the effect pattern. It is determined whether or not (button display) is included, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S3223, and if not applicable, various effect setting processes are terminated. In step S3223, after turning on the button reservation flag, various effect setting processes are terminated.

<Embodiment 4 / First to third productions / Overview>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the outline of the first to third effects that can be executed by the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 59 is a time chart for explaining the outline of the interlocking effect (first effect) and the 1G complete effect (second effect) that can be executed by the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment.

The "first effect" according to the present invention is an effect that may be executed including a certain period (in this example, a game period of one game represented by reference numeral T1 in FIG. 59), and in this example, the effect is executed. The "interlocking effect" that is executed over a plurality of games (three games), which will be described, corresponds to an example of the first effect. The production mode of the second production is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a privilege notification production for notifying that an AT addition game will be granted.

Further, the "second effect" according to the present invention is an effect that may be executed including a certain period (in this example, a game period of one game indicated by reference numeral T1 in FIG. 59). The "1G complete production" that is completed in one game, which will be described in the example, corresponds to an example of the second production. The production mode of the second effect is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a small role announcement effect.

Further, when only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in a certain period (first case), the first effect and the second effect are available. There is a case where it is executed more than once in at least a part of the period (the second case), and "a case where only the 1G completion effect is executed out of the 1G completion effect and the interlocking effect" shown in FIG. 59 (b). "Applies to an example of the first case, and" a case where both of the 1G complete effect and the interlocking effect overlap "as shown in FIG. 59 (c) corresponds to an example of the second case.

Further, in the first effect, a display (first operation display) prompting the operation of the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is displayed, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (first effect). The response effect) is executed, and the "button display A" that prompts the operation of the chance button 136 described in this example corresponds to an example of the first operation display, and the chance button described in this example The “operation response display A” displayed in response to the 136 operations corresponds to an example of the first response effect.

Further, in the second effect of the second case, a display (second operation display) prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is displayed, and the operation means is operated. The effect (second response effect) is executed, and the "button display B" that prompts the operation of the chance button 136, which is explained in this example, corresponds to an example of the second operation display. The “operation response display B” displayed in response to the operation of the chance button 136, which will be described, corresponds to an example of the second response effect.

The "operating means" according to the present invention is not limited to the chance button 136, and may be, for example, a medal insertion button 130 to 132, a start lever 135, a stop button 137 to 139, or the like.

Further, the "third effect" according to the present invention is an effect in which the second operation display (button display B in this example) and the second response effect (operation response display B in this example) are not executed. In the second case, the third effect is executed instead of the second effect, and the "third effect" executed in the 1G complete effect shown in FIG. 59 (c) is the third effect. It corresponds to one example of the three productions.

According to the effect as shown in FIG. 59 (c), the first effect (interlocking effect) and the second effect (1G complete effect) are executed in duplicate in at least a part of a certain period T1. In this case, instead of the second effect, the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed. Therefore, since the third effect is executed, the operation display and the response effect by the first effect and the second effect are executed. By avoiding duplication of, it may be possible to make the production easier to understand.

The third effect is different from the effect including the first operation display (button display A in this example) and the first response effect (operation response display A in this example). The first operation display (button display A in this example) and the first response effect (operation response display A in this example) may be overlapped with each other, or the first operation display may be executed. (In this example, the button display A) and the first response effect (in this example, the operation response display A) may be included (the same applies hereinafter).

<Embodiment 4 / First to Third Production / Modification 1>
The "certain period" according to the present invention is not limited to the game period of one game, and may be, for example, the game period of a plurality of games, or a predetermined period of the game period of one game (for example, input). It may be the period from the operation of the button 130 to the operation of the start lever 135, the period from the operation of the input button 130 to the operation of the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.). ..

FIG. 60 (a) is a time chart showing another example of the "certain period" according to the present invention. In this example, both the interlocking effect (first effect) and the 1G complete effect (second effect) are operated by the input button 130 indicated by the reference numeral T2 in FIG. 60 (a) for a certain period of time (in this example, the input button 130 is operated. It is executed including the period from when the button is pressed until the first stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed).

If the 1G complete effect (second effect) of this example is not executed in duplicate with the interlocking effect (first effect), after a certain period of time T2 has elapsed (the first stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139). (After that), a display (button display B (second operation display)) prompting the operation of the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is displayed, and the operation means is operated. The effect (operation response display B (second response effect)) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60A, when the interlocking effect (first effect) is executed in duplicate, the first stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed after a certain period of time T2 has elapsed (the first stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139). After that), the third effect (the effect in which the button display B (second operation display) and the operation response display B (second response effect) are not executed) is executed instead of the second effect. ..

According to the effect as shown in FIG. 60 (a), the first effect (interlocking effect) and the second effect (1G complete effect) are executed in duplicate in at least a part of a certain period T2. In this case, instead of the second effect, the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed. Therefore, since the third effect is executed, the operation display and the response effect by the first effect and the second effect are executed. By avoiding duplication of, it may be possible to make the production easier to understand.

<Embodiment 4 / First to third effects / Modification example 2>
Further, the "second effect" according to the present invention is not limited to the 1G complete effect, and may be, for example, a "linked effect" executed over a plurality of games (2 games).

FIG. 60B is a time chart showing another example of the “second effect” according to the present invention. In this example, the 3G interlocking effect (first effect) and the 2G interlocking effect (second effect) are both for a certain period (in this example, the input button 130 indicated by the reference numeral T31 in FIG. 60B). It is executed including the period from the operation to the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

If the 2G interlocking effect (second effect) of this example is not executed in duplicate with the 3G interlocking effect (first effect), after a period of time T32 longer than a certain period T31 (in this example, in this example). After the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is performed), a display (button display B (second operation display)) prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is displayed. An effect (operation response display B (second response effect)) corresponding to the operation of the operation means is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60B, when the 3G interlocking effect (first effect) is executed in duplicate, after a certain period of time T31 has elapsed (the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139). After that), the third effect (button display B (second operation display) and operation response display B (second response effect) is not executed) is executed instead of the second effect. NS.

According to the effect as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the first effect (interlocking effect) and the second effect (1G complete effect) are executed in duplicate in at least a part of a certain period T31. In this case, instead of the second effect, the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed. Therefore, since the third effect is executed, the operation display and the response effect by the first effect and the second effect are executed. By avoiding duplication of, it may be possible to make the production easier to understand.

<Embodiment 4 / First to third effects / Modification 3>
Further, the "first effect" according to the present invention may be a 1G complete effect, and the "second effect" according to the present invention may be an interlocking effect.

FIG. 60 (c) is a time chart showing other examples of the "first effect" and the "second effect" according to the present invention. In this example, the 1G complete effect (first effect) and the 3G interlocking effect (second effect) are both for a certain period (in this example, the input button 130 indicated by the reference numeral T4 in FIG. 60 (c)). It is executed including the period from the operation to the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

If the 3G interlocking effect (second effect) of this example is not executed in duplicate with the 1G complete effect (first effect), after a certain period of time T4 has elapsed (in this example, the stop buttons 137 to 139). (After the third stop operation is performed), a display (button display B (second operation display)) prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is displayed, and the operation means operates. The effect (operation response display B (second response effect)) corresponding to the effect is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), when the 1G completion effect (second effect) is executed in duplicate, after a certain period of time T4 has elapsed (the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139). After that), the third effect (button display B (second operation display) and operation response display B (second response effect) is not executed) is executed instead of the second effect. NS.

According to the effect as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the first effect (interlocking effect) and the second effect (1G complete effect) are executed in duplicate in at least a part of a certain period T4. In this case, instead of the second effect, the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed. Therefore, since the third effect is executed, the operation display and the response effect by the first effect and the second effect are executed. By avoiding duplication of, it may be possible to make the production easier to understand.

<Embodiment 4 / Specific example of the first production and the second production>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, a specific example of the effect that the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment can execute will be described.

<Embodiment 4 / Specific example 1 of the first production and the second production>
First, a specific example 1 of the first effect and the second effect will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 (a) is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of the 1G complete effect when it is not executed in duplicate with the interlocking effect (first effect), and FIG. 61 (b) is a diagram showing the interlocking effect (1). It is a figure which showed the specific example 1 of the 1G completion production in the case of being executed overlapping with the 1st production) in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), there is a case where the 1G complete effect (second effect) of this example is not executed in duplicate with the interlocking effect (first effect) (first case). After the lapse of the period T1 (in this example, the period from the operation of the start lever 135 to the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), the operation is performed as shown in FIGS. A display (button display B (second operation display SD2)) prompting the operation of the means (chance button 136 in this example) is displayed, and the operation means is operated as shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (2). The effect (operation response display B (second response effect RP2)) corresponding to the effect is executed.

In the button display B (second operation display SD2) of this example, the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed on the character image of the grandfather in the central display area of the effect image display device 157 as a display prompting the operation of the chance button 136. The imitated button image is displayed by overlapping the image with the character string "press". Further, in the operation response display B (second response effect RP2), as an effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, the game is displayed on the character image of the grandfather in the central display area of the effect image display device 157. In this example, the images including the display notifying the number of AT additional games to be given together with the 1G completion effect (in this example, the display of a character string such as "+ 10G") are displayed in an overlapping manner.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), when the 1G complete effect (second effect) of this example is executed in duplicate with the interlocking effect (first effect), T1 (for a certain period of time) ( In this example, after the lapse of the period from the operation of the start lever 135 to the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), instead of the second effect, the third effect (button display B (button display B (button display B)) The second operation display) and the operation response display B (effect in which the second response effect) is not executed) are executed.

Further, in the interlocking effect (first effect) that is executed in duplicate with this 1G complete effect (second effect), T1 (in this example, in this example, the start lever 135 is operated and then the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to After the elapse of the period until the third stop operation of 139 is performed), as shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (1), a display (button display A) prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136 in this example) is performed. (Second operation display SD1)) is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (2), an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (operation response display A (first response effect RP1)) is displayed. )) Is executed.

In the button display A (second operation display SD1) of this example, unlike the button display B (second operation display SD2) shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1), the central display of the effect image display device 157 is displayed. In the area, an image in which the character string "press" is applied to the button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed. Further, in the operation response display A (first response effect RP1), unlike the operation response display B (second response effect RP2) shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (2), the center of the effect image display device 157 In the display area, as an effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, a display (in this example, a character string such as "+ 50G") is displayed to announce the number of AT additional games to be given together with the interlocking effect.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (1), in addition to displaying the button display A (second operation display SD1), the grandfather character is displayed in the upper left corner of the effect image display device 157. An image is displayed and a display for notifying the number of AT-added games to be given in the game (in this example, a character string such as "+ 10G" is displayed) is also performed.

Further, when the AT addition game is not added in the game, the button display A (second operation display SD1) and the operation response display A (first response effect) are shown as shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and 61 (3). Instead of RP1), a fake (Gase) production that announces that the AT addition game will not be granted (in this example, the display of an image showing that the character of the palace lost the competition with the character of the grandfather and "escape" ”) Is displayed.

The operation means for prompting the operation by the second operation display and the operation means for prompting the operation by the second operation display may be the same operation means as in this example, or may be different operation means. good. Therefore, for example, when the 1G complete effect (second effect) is not executed in duplicate with the interlocking effect (first effect) (first case), the 1G complete effect (second effect) is performed. Instead of the second operation display SD1 that prompts the operation of the chance button 136 as shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1), another operation means (book) as shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1'). In the example, a second operation display prompting the operation of the start lever 135) may be performed.

Further, the display modes of the button display A (second operation display SD1) and the operation response display A (first response effect RP1) are limited to the display modes shown in FIGS. 61 (b), (1), and (2). First, for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 (b) (1') and (2'), the number of AT-added games given together with the 1G completion effect in the game in the operation response display A (first response effect RP1). (In this example, 10G) and the total number of AT-added games (50G in this example) given together with the interlocking effect may be displayed (in this example, a character string such as "+ 60G" is displayed). ..

According to the effect according to this example, when the first effect (interlocking effect) and the second effect (1G complete effect) are executed in duplicate in T1 for at least a part of a certain period, the second effect is performed. Instead of the effect of, the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed. The third effect (button display A (second operation display SD1) shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and (1)) and FIG. 61 ( b) Since the operation response display A (effect including the first response effect RP1) shown in (2) is executed, the effect can be made easier to understand by avoiding duplication of the operation display and the response effect. In some cases.

<Embodiment 4 / Specific example 2 of the first production and the second production>
Next, a specific example 2 of the first effect and the second effect will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing a specific example 2 of the 1G complete effect when it is not executed in duplicate with the interlocking effect (first effect), and FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram showing the interlocking effect (b). It is a figure which showed the specific example 2 of the 1G completion effect in the time series when it is executed overlapping with (the first effect). The description of the effect described with reference to FIG. 62 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), there is a case where the 1G complete effect (second effect) of this example is not executed in duplicate with the interlocking effect (first effect) (first case). After the lapse of the period T2 (in this example, the period from the operation of the start lever 135 to the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), the operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (1). A display (button display B (second operation display SD21)) prompting the operation of the means (chance button 136 in this example) is displayed, and the operation means is operated as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (2). The effect (operation response display B (second response effect RP2)) corresponding to the effect is executed.

In the button display B (second operation display SD21) of this example, the character image of the grandfather and the appearance of the chance button 136 are displayed as a display prompting the operation of the chance button 136 in the display area in the upper left corner of the effect image display device 157. A button image imitating the above is displayed with the character string "press" added. Further, in the operation response display B (second response effect RP2), as an effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, the game is displayed on the character image of the grandfather in the central display area of the effect image display device 157. In this example, the images including the display notifying the number of AT additional games to be given together with the 1G completion effect (in this example, the display of a character string such as "+ 10G") are displayed in an overlapping manner.

Further, in this example, when the operation corresponding to the button display B (second operation display SD21) (in this example, the operation of the chance button 136) is not performed, after a certain period of time T2 has elapsed (this example). Then, after the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (3), a display prompting the operation of the operation means (chance button 136 in this example) (button display B (button display B (button display B)). The second operation display SD22)) is displayed.

In the button display B'(second operation display SD22) of this example, in the central display area of the effect image display device 157, a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed as a display prompting the operation of the chance button 136. An image with the character string "press" is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), when the 1G complete effect (second effect) of this example is executed in duplicate with the interlocking effect (first effect), T2 (2) (for a certain period of time) In this example, after the lapse of the period from the operation of the start lever 135 to the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), instead of the second effect, the third effect (button display B (button display B (button display B)) The second operation display) and the operation response display B (effect in which the second response effect) is not executed) are executed.

Further, in the interlocking effect (first effect) that is executed in duplicate with this 1G complete effect (second effect), T2 (in this example, in this example, the start lever 135 is operated and then the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 to After the elapse of the period until the second stop operation of 139 is performed (in this example, after the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139), as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and (1), the operating means A display (button display A (second operation display SD1)) prompting the operation of (chance button 136 in this example) is displayed, and the operation means is operated as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (2). The effect (operation response display A (first response effect RP1)) corresponding to the event is executed.

In the button display A (second operation display SD1) of this example, unlike the button display B (second operation display SD21) shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (1), the central display of the effect image display device 157 is displayed. In the area, an image in which the character string "press" is applied to the button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 is displayed. Further, in the operation response display A (first response effect RP1), unlike the operation response display B (second response effect RP2) shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (2), the chance button 136 was operated. As an effect according to the above, a display (in this example, a character string such as "+ 50G") is displayed to announce the number of AT additional games to be given together with the interlocking effect.

According to the effect according to this example, when the first effect (interlocking effect) and the second effect (1G complete effect) are executed in duplicate in at least a part of a certain period T2, the second effect is performed. Instead of the effect of, the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed. The third effect (button display A (second operation display SD1) shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and (1)) and FIG. 62 ( b) Since the operation response display A (effect including the first response effect RP1) shown in (2) is executed, the effect can be made easier to understand by avoiding duplication of the operation display and the response effect. In some cases.

<Embodiment 4 / Specific example 3 of the first production and the second production>
Next, a specific example 3 of the first effect and the second effect will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of a 1G complete effect in chronological order when it is executed in an overlapping manner with the interlocking effect (first effect). The description of the effect described with reference to FIG. 62 will be omitted.

In this example, the first effect (in this example, the 1G complete effect) and the second effect (in this example, the interlocking effect) are executed in duplicate in a certain period, and the second effect (in this example, the interlocking effect) is executed in a certain period. When the freeze described in the third embodiment or the like is executed at least in part, the period during which the freeze is executed is the first effect (in this example, the 1G complete effect) and the second effect (this example). Shows an example in which a part of the interlocking effect) is not executed.

In this example, a certain period (in this example, the period from the second stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to the third stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139) is performed. (Freeze period), and during the freeze period, a black background image and a certain character string (in this example, the character string "CHANGE !! Is it a chance?") Are continuously displayed. Then, a part of the first effect (in this example, the 1G complete effect) and the second effect (in this example, the interlocking effect) is not executed.

As in this example, when a special effect (freeze effect in this example) is performed, if a part of the first effect and the second effect is not executed, the effect will be surprising. By giving, it may be possible to enhance the interest of the player.

<Embodiment 4 / Invention 4-1 of the present application>
As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention 4-1 is an operating means (for example, the medal insertion shown in FIG. 1) provided at a position where the player can operate the game table. Buttons 130 to 132, start lever 135, stop buttons 137 to 139, chance buttons 136), production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 1, speaker, etc.). A game table including a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, FIG. 59). ~ 3G interlocking effect shown in FIG. 61 and the like), and one type of effect among the plurality of types of effect is a second effect (for example, 1G complete effect shown in FIG. 61 and the like), and the plurality of types of effect. One type of effect is a third effect (for example, the third effect shown in FIG. 60 and the like), and the first effect is for a certain period (for example, FIG. 59 (c)). The second effect is the effect that may be executed during the period indicated by the reference numeral T1, the period indicated by the reference numeral T2 in FIG. 60 (a), and the period indicated by the reference numeral T31 in FIG. 60 (b). An effect that may be executed in a certain period, and only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in the certain period (hereinafter, "the first". One case ”. For example, there is a case where only the 1G complete effect is executed out of the 1G complete effect and the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 59 (b)), and the first effect and the second effect or the above. There is a case where the third effect is performed in duplicate for at least a part of the certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "second case" ) , and the first effect is the operation means of the operation means. A display prompting an operation (hereinafter, referred to as a “first operation display”; for example, a button display A shown in FIGS. 59 (c), 60 (a), etc.) is displayed, and the operation means is operated. The effect (hereinafter referred to as “first response effect”; for example, the operation response display A shown in FIGS. 59 (c) and 60 (a)) is executed, and the above-mentioned effect in the first case. In the second effect, a display prompting the operation of the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation display"; for example, the button display B shown in FIG. 59B) was displayed, and the operating means was operated. It is an effect in which an effect corresponding to the above (hereinafter, referred to as “second response effect”; for example, the operation response display B shown in FIG. 59 (b)) is executed, and in the second case, the first Performance At the same time as the output is executed , instead of the second effect, the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed, and another certain effect, the third effect, is executed. The third effect is an effect executed during at least a part of the certain period, and the third effect is an effect that does not include a display prompting the operation of the operation means, and the third effect is the effect. In the second case, the effect of is executed in a state where the first operation display in the first effect is started to be displayed, and the first response effect and the second effect. The response effect is a notification regarding the addition of the privilege, the third effect is a notice regarding the addition of the privilege, and the first response effect in the second case is the first effect and the first effect. It is a game table characterized in that it is a production that is notified by adding up the additions of the above-mentioned benefits that are scheduled to be notified in the second production.

According to the amusement machine according to the present invention 4-1, when the first effect and the second effect of the runs overlap at least part of the duration of a period of time, in the second rendition of running before operation display response effect is performed, instead of the second effect, since the third rendition of the second operation display and the second response effect of is not performed is performed, a first effect While executing the second effect in duplicate, it may be possible to avoid duplication of the operation display and the response effect by continuing the second effect, and it may be possible to make the effect easier to understand.
The trigger for starting the display of the second operation display in the first case and the trigger for starting the display of the first operation display in the first case may be the same trigger. Further, the first response effect, the second response effect, and the third effect may be the same type of advance notice or the notification.

Further, the aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first aspect") of the second response effect (for example, the second response effect SD2 shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1)) in the first case and the above. In the second case, the mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second mode”) of the third effect (for example, the effect including the first response effect SD1 shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and (1)) is the same. The first aspect and the second aspect are different in the position of the display, the size of the display, the color of the display, the presence or absence of a specific decoration, and at least one of the sounds. It may be a thing.

With such a configuration, the player may be able to recognize that the operation display and the response effect were planned to be duplicated. In addition, there are cases where variations can be given to the mode of production depending on the conditions.

Further, the effect determining means (for example, various effect setting processes shown in FIG. 58) for determining the effect to be executed by the effect means is provided, and the effect determining means has a first timing (for example, step S3205 of various effect setting processes). ) Is a means capable of determining the execution of the first effect, and the effect determining means can determine the execution of the second effect at a second timing (for example, step S3219 of various effect setting processes). As a means, the first timing and the second timing may be different timings.

With such a configuration, a condition in which the operation display and the response effect overlap accidentally is satisfied, and the mode may be changed depending on the condition being satisfied.

Further, the certain period is at least a part of the second game, and the effect determining means is a game started before the second game (hereinafter, "first game"). It is a means capable of deciding the execution of the first effect at the first timing related to the second game, and the effect determining means is the second timing related to the second game. It is a means capable of deciding the execution of the second effect, and the first effect is a part of the continuous effect executed from the first game to the second game, and the second effect. The effect of may be an effect executed only in the second game.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to prioritize the operation display and the response effect of the continuous effect that the player expects over a plurality of games.

Further, when only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in a certain game, a part of the period (hereinafter, "first"). The first operation display is displayed in (referred to as "period"), and when only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in a certain game, the above-mentioned The second operation display is displayed in a part of a certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "second period"), and the first period and the second period are at least a part. There may be periods in which the periods of are overlapped.

Further, there is a case where only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in the certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "third case"), and the third effect. The first response effect in the above case is an effect displayed in the first area of the display means, and the second response effect in the first case is displayed in the second area of the display means. The effect to be displayed, the third effect in the second case is an effect displayed in the third area of the display means, and the second area is at least the first area. A part of the region overlaps, and the third region may be a region that does not overlap with the first region.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to show both effects. Moreover, even if the response effect is not displayed, the same result is obtained, so that the player does not feel distrust.

Further, in the second case where both the first effect and the second effect are performed, in the game targeted for the certain period, the first operation display (button display) is performed first. Is performed, and if the button is pressed before the first effect and the second effect overlap, and the first response effect is performed, the same effect as the first effect is performed. It may be configured as.

<Embodiment 4 / Invention 4-2 of the present application>
Further, the game console according to the present invention 4-2 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is an operating means (for example, the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132 shown in FIG. 1) provided at a position where the player can operate the game table. , Start lever 135, stop buttons 137 to 139, chance buttons 136), effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 1, speaker, etc.), and display means (for example). , The effect image display device 157) shown in FIG. 1, and the effect of one of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect (for example, FIGS. 59 to 61, etc.). (3G interlocking effect shown in), and one type of effect among the plurality of types of effect is a second effect (for example, 1G complete effect shown in FIGS. 59 to 61), and the plurality of types of effect. One type of effect is a third effect (for example, the third effect shown in FIGS. 59 to 60 and the like), and the first effect is for a certain period (for example, FIG. 59 (for example, FIG. 59). The second effect is an effect that may be executed during the period indicated by the reference numeral T1 in c), the period indicated by the reference numeral T2 in FIG. 60 (a), and the period indicated by the reference numeral T31 in FIG. 60 (b). , The effect that may be executed during the certain period, and only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed during the certain period (hereinafter, There is a "first case". For example, there is a case where only the 1G complete effect is executed out of the 1G complete effect and the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 59 (b)), and the first effect and the second effect are performed. Is executed more than once in at least a part of the certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "second case". For example, both the 1G complete effect and the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 59 (c)). The first effect is a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation display”; for example, FIGS. 59 (c) and 60 (a)). The button display A) shown in the above is displayed, and an effect corresponding to the operation of the operating means (hereinafter, referred to as “first response effect”; for example, in FIGS. The operation response display A) shown is an effect to be executed, and the second effect in the first case is a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation display”, for example, FIG. The button display B) shown in 59 (b) is displayed, and the effect corresponding to the operation of the operating means (hereinafter referred to as “second response effect”. For example, the operation response display shown in FIG. 59 (b)). B ) Is executed, and in the second case, the first effect is executed and the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed as the second effect. In addition, another certain effect, the third effect, is executed, the third effect is an effect executed during at least a part of the certain period, and the third effect is the effect. It is an effect that does not include a display prompting the operation of the operating means, and the first response effect, the second response effect, and the third effect are notifications regarding a notice or a privilege, and the said in the first case. The gaming table is characterized in that the timing at which the third effect is started in the second case is earlier than the timing at which the second response effect is started.

According to the game console according to the invention 4-2 of the present application, when the first effect and the second effect are performed in duplicate for at least a part of a certain period, instead of the second effect, The second operation display and the second response effect are not executed. Since the third effect is executed, it may be possible to make the effect easier to understand by avoiding duplication of the operation display and the response effect. Further, the timing at which the third effect is started is the second when only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in a certain period (the first case). Since the timing is earlier than the timing at which the response effect is started, it may be possible to perform an effect that is easier for the player to understand by different timing of the response effect (result display).

Further, in a certain game, the timing at which the third effect in the second case is started may be the timing at which the second operation display in the first case is started.

With such a configuration, the timing of the response effect (result display) is different from the timing of the third effect start timing, so that it may be possible to perform an effect that is easier for the player to understand.

Further, the aspect (hereinafter, referred to as "first aspect") of the second response effect (for example, the second response effect SD2 shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (1)) in the first case and the above. In the second case, the mode (hereinafter, referred to as “second mode”) of the third effect (for example, the effect including the first response effect SD1 shown in FIGS. 61 (b) and (1)) is the same. The first aspect and the second aspect are different in the position of the display, the size of the display, the color of the display, the presence or absence of a specific decoration, and at least one of the sounds. It may be a thing.

With such a configuration, the player may be able to recognize that the operation display and the response effect were planned to be duplicated. In addition, there are cases where variations can be given to the mode of production depending on the conditions.

Further, the effect determining means (for example, various effect setting processes shown in FIG. 58) for determining the effect to be executed by the effect means is provided, and the effect determining means has a first timing (for example, step S3205 of various effect setting processes). ) Is a means capable of determining the execution of the first effect, and the effect determining means can determine the execution of the second effect at a second timing (for example, step S3219 of various effect setting processes). As a means, the first timing and the second timing may be different timings.

With such a configuration, a condition in which the operation display and the response effect overlap accidentally is satisfied, and the mode may be changed depending on the condition being satisfied.

Further, the certain period is at least a part of the second game, and the effect determining means is a game started before the second game (hereinafter, "first game"). It is a means capable of deciding the execution of the first effect at the first timing related to the second game, and the effect determining means is the second timing related to the second game. It is a means capable of deciding the execution of the second effect, and the first effect is a part of the continuous effect executed from the first game to the second game, and the second effect. The effect of may be an effect executed only in the second game.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to prioritize the operation display and the response effect of the continuous effect that the player expects over a plurality of games.

Further, when only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in a certain game, a part of the period (hereinafter, "first"). The first operation display is displayed in (referred to as "period"), and when only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in a certain game, the above-mentioned The second operation display is displayed in a part of a certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "second period"), and the first period and the second period are at least a part. There may be periods in which the periods of are overlapped.

Further, there is a case where only the first effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in the certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "third case"), and the third effect. The first response effect in the above case is an effect displayed in the first area of the display means, and the second response effect in the first case is displayed in the second area of the display means. The effect to be displayed, the third effect in the second case is an effect displayed in the third area of the display means, and the second area is at least the first area. A part of the region overlaps, and the third region may be a region that does not overlap with the first region.

With such a configuration, it may be possible to show both effects. Moreover, even if the response effect is not displayed, the same result is obtained, so that the player does not feel distrust.

Further, in the second case where both the first effect and the second effect are performed, in the game targeted for the certain period, the first operation display (button display) is performed first. Is performed, and if the button is pressed before the first effect and the second effect overlap, and the first response effect is performed, the same effect as the first effect is performed. It may be configured as.

Further, the second response effect executed in the first case and the second response effect executed in the second case may be the same.

With such a configuration, even if the response effect is not displayed, the same result may be obtained, so that the player may not feel distrust.

The configuration of the gaming table according to the inventions 4-1 and 4-2 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the gaming table described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 62. Therefore, for example, the first effect and the second effect are not limited to the effect during the AT, and may be, for example, an effect during the bonus period or during the precursor (precursor) before the start of the AT. Further, in the effects described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like, the first effect and the second effect may be interchanged. For example, as the first effect, the 1G complete effect shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like may be exchanged. , And as the second effect, the 3G interlocking effect shown in FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like may be applied.

Further, the operation effect and the response effect of the effect may be prioritized over the continuous effect. Further, the contents (display mode, display timing, etc.) of the second response effect may be the same or different between the first case and the second case. Further, when a special effect (for example, a freeze effect) is performed, at least a part of the first and second effects may not be executed. Further, the content of the response effect (display mode, display timing, etc.) may be different between the first case and the second case. Further, the privilege given to the player is not limited to the number of AT additional games, and may be, for example, payout of game media, bonus games, additional AT game sets, and the like.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention has a "launching device 1010 for launching a ball into a predetermined gaming area 1002 and a winning opening 1006 configured to allow the ball launched from the launching device 1010 to enter," as shown in FIG. A variable display device that variablely displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), a detection means 1008 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening, a payout means 1012 that pays out the ball when the detection means 1008 detects the ball, and The pachinko machine 1000, which is equipped with 1004 and, when a game ball enters the winning opening and wins a prize, causes the variable display device 1004 to stop and display after changing the design to notify the transition of the game state. Suitable. In such a pachinko machine 1000, for example, as an example of the "second effect (or first effect)" according to the inventions 4-1 and 4-2 of the present application, a look-ahead notice such as a continuous notice is applied to the present application. The notice can be applied as an example of the "first effect (or second effect)" according to the inventions 4-1 and 4-2.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

The gaming table according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming table typified by a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Design display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Production image display device 300 Main control unit 400 1st sub-control unit 421 Production lamp 500 2nd sub-control unit

Claims (2)

An operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A production means that can execute multiple types of production,
Display means and
It is a game table equipped with
One of the plurality of types of effects is the first effect.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the second effect.
One of the plurality of types of effects is the third effect.
The first effect is an effect that may be performed for a certain period of time.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed during the certain period.
There is a case where only the second effect of the first effect and the second effect is executed in the certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "first case").
When the first effect and the second effect or the third effect are executed in duplicate for at least a part of the certain period (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"). can be,
In the first effect, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation display") is displayed, and an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, "first operation display") is displayed. It is a production in which "response production" is executed.
In the second effect in the first case, a display prompting the operation of the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation display") is displayed, and an effect corresponding to the operation of the operation means is displayed. (Hereinafter, referred to as "second response effect") is an effect to be executed.
In the second case, the first effect is executed , and instead of the second effect, the second operation display and the second response effect are not executed, and another effect is provided. The third production is executed,
The third effect is an effect performed during at least a part of the certain period.
The third effect is an effect that does not include a display prompting the operation of the operation means.
The third effect is an effect that is executed in the second case with the first operation display in the first effect being displayed.
The first response effect and the second response effect are notifications regarding the addition of benefits.
The third effect is a notice regarding the addition of the privilege.
The first response effect in the second case is an effect that is notified by adding up the addition of the privilege to be notified in the first effect and the second effect.
A game table characterized by that. The game console according to claim 1.
The first effect is a part of a continuous effect executed in a plurality of games.
The second effect is an effect executed only in one of the plurality of games.
A game table characterized by that.

Images